* ppc-opc.c (NON32, NO371): Remove PPC_OPCODE_PPCPS.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
729c05fc 4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011
8a308ae8 5@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 6@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 7@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
8@include configdoc.texi
9@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 10@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 11@c man end
252b5132
RH
12
13@c @smallbook
14
ff5dcc92
SC
15@macro gcctabopt{body}
16@code{\body\}
17@end macro
18
0285c67d
NC
19@c man begin NAME
20@ifset man
21@c Configure for the generation of man pages
22@set UsesEnvVars
23@set GENERIC
0285c67d 24@set ARM
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set I960
0285c67d 28@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 29@set M68K
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
32@set POWERPC
33@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
34@set Renesas
35@set SPU
36@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 37@set WIN32
e0001a05 38@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
39@end ifset
40@c man end
41
9160ea82
AM
42@ifnottex
43@dircategory Software development
44@direntry
252b5132 45* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
46@end direntry
47@end ifnottex
252b5132 48
0e9517a9 49@copying
e49e529d
JM
50This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
51@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
52@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
53@end ifset
54version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 55
9fbcbd81 56Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
8a308ae8 572001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 58
cf055d54 59Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 60under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
61or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
62with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
63Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 64section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 65@end copying
252b5132
RH
66@iftex
67@finalout
68@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 69@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 70@titlepage
71ba23f6 71@title The GNU linker
252b5132 72@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
73@subtitle @code{ld}
74@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
75@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
76@end ifset
252b5132
RH
77@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
78@author Steve Chamberlain
79@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
80@page
81
82@tex
83{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
84\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
85\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 86\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
87\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
88}
89\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
90@end tex
91
92@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 93@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9fbcbd81
NC
94Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
951999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free
96Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
137@end ifset
138@ifset I960
139* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
140@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
141@ifset ARM
142* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
143@end ifset
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
147@ifset M68HC11
148* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
149@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
150@ifset M68K
151* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
159@ifset SPU
160* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
161@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
162@ifset TICOFF
163* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
164@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
165@ifset WIN32
166* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
167@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
168@ifset XTENSA
169* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
170@end ifset
252b5132
RH
171@end ifclear
172@ifclear SingleFormat
173* BFD:: BFD
174@end ifclear
175@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
176
177* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
178* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 179* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 180* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 181@end menu
84ec0e6d 182@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
183
184@node Overview
185@chapter Overview
186
187@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
188@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 189
0879a67a 190@ifset man
0285c67d 191@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 192ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
193@c man end
194
195@c man begin SEEALSO
196ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
197the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
198@file{ld}.
199@c man end
200@end ifset
201
202@c man begin DESCRIPTION
203
ff5dcc92 204@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 205their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 206compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 207
ff5dcc92 208@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
209a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
210to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
211
0285c67d
NC
212@ifset man
213@c For the man only
ece2d90e 214This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
215@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
216language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
217@end ifset
218
252b5132 219@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
220This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
221to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
222write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
223@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
224available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
225@end ifclear
226
227Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
228linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
229execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 230@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
231(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
232
0285c67d
NC
233@c man end
234
252b5132
RH
235@node Invocation
236@chapter Invocation
237
0285c67d
NC
238@c man begin DESCRIPTION
239
ff5dcc92 240The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
241and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
242you have many choices to control its behavior.
243
0285c67d
NC
244@c man end
245
252b5132
RH
246@ifset UsesEnvVars
247@menu
248* Options:: Command Line Options
249* Environment:: Environment Variables
250@end menu
251
252@node Options
253@section Command Line Options
254@end ifset
255
256@cindex command line
257@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
258
259@c man begin OPTIONS
260
252b5132
RH
261The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
262practice few of them are used in any particular context.
263@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 264For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
265object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
266link a file @code{hello.o}:
267
268@smallexample
269ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
270@end smallexample
271
ff5dcc92 272This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
273result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
274the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
275directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
276
ff5dcc92 277Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
278point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
279as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
280which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
281files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
282different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
283occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
284option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
285noted in the descriptions below.
286
287@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
288Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
289together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
290options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
291an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
292
293Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
294specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
295and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
296are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
297message @samp{No input files}.
298
36f63dca 299If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
300assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
301augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
302linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
303permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
304or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
305@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
306script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
307extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
308to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
309the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
310
311For options whose names are a single letter,
312option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
313whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
314option that requires them.
315
316For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 317precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 318@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 319this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 320only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
321@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
322name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
323output.
324
325Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
326option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
327immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
328@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
329Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
330accepted.
252b5132 331
36f63dca
NC
332Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
333(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
334prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
335compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
336
337@smallexample
2509a395 338 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
339@end smallexample
340
341This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
342silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
343may also arise when passing options that require values through a
344driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
345a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
346and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
347the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
348
349@smallexample
350 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
351@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
352
353Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
354linker:
355
ff5dcc92 356@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 357@include at-file.texi
dff70155 358
2509a395
SL
359@kindex -a @var{keyword}
360@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
361This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
362argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
363@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
364@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
365to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
366
7ee314fa
AM
367@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
368@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
370@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
371specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
372will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
373finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
374it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
375This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
376interface.
377
252b5132
RH
378@ifset I960
379@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
380@kindex -A @var{arch}
381@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
382@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
383@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
384In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
385Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
386@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
387the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 388archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
389family}, for details.
390
ff5dcc92 391Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
392other architecture families.
393@end ifset
394
395@ifclear SingleFormat
396@cindex binary input format
397@kindex -b @var{format}
398@kindex --format=@var{format}
399@cindex input format
400@cindex input format
401@item -b @var{input-format}
402@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
403@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
404file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 405@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 406that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 407configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 408to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
409default input format the most usual format on each machine.
410@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
411supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
412formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
413@xref{BFD}.
414
415You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
416binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
417linking object files of different formats), by including
418@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 419particular format.
252b5132
RH
420
421The default format is taken from the environment variable
422@code{GNUTARGET}.
423@ifset UsesEnvVars
424@xref{Environment}.
425@end ifset
426You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
427@code{TARGET};
428@ifclear man
429see @ref{Format Commands}.
430@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
431@end ifclear
432
433@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
434@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
435@cindex compatibility, MRI
436@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
437@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 438For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 439files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
440@ifclear man
441@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
442@end ifclear
443@ifset man
444the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
445@end ifset
446Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 447the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
448scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
449If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
450specified by any @samp{-L} options.
451
452@cindex common allocation
453@kindex -d
454@kindex -dc
455@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 456@item -d
252b5132
RH
457@itemx -dc
458@itemx -dp
459These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
460compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
461even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
462script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
463@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
464
7ee314fa
AM
465@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
466@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
467@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
470@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
471specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
472will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
473option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
474The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
475
252b5132
RH
476@cindex entry point, from command line
477@kindex -e @var{entry}
478@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 479@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
480@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
481Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
482program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
483named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
484and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
485base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
486@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
487and other ways of specifying the entry point.
488
b58f81ae
DJ
489@kindex --exclude-libs
490@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
491Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 492exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
493@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
494automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
495port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
496explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
497option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
498be treated as hidden.
499
e1c37eb5
DK
500@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
501@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
502Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
503should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
504into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
505may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
506used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
507the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
508match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
509command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
510of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
511regardless of this option.
512
252b5132
RH
513@cindex dynamic symbol table
514@kindex -E
515@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 516@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
517@item -E
518@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
519@itemx --no-export-dynamic
520When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
521option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
522all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
523set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
524
525If you do not use either of these options (or use the
526@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
527dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
528referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
529
530If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
531back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
532dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
533linking the program itself.
534
55255dae 535You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 536be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 537See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 538
8b747e1a
DK
539Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
540support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
541the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
542
36f63dca 543@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
544@cindex big-endian objects
545@cindex endianness
546@kindex -EB
547@item -EB
548Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
549
550@cindex little-endian objects
551@kindex -EL
552@item -EL
553Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 554@end ifclear
252b5132 555
2509a395
SL
556@kindex -f @var{name}
557@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
558@item -f @var{name}
559@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
560When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
561to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
562table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
563symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
564
565If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
566run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
567the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
568first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
569@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
570in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
571Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
572implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
573machine specific performance.
574
575This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
576will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
577
2509a395
SL
578@kindex -F @var{name}
579@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 580@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 581@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
582When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
583the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
584of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
585on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
586
587If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
588run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
589dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
590filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
591found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
592used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
593@var{name}.
594
ff5dcc92 595Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 596toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
597object files.
598@ifclear SingleFormat
599The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 600@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 601@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
602environment variable.
603@end ifclear
604The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
605creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 606
3dbf70a2 607@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
608@kindex -fini=@var{name}
609@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
610When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
611executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
612address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
613the function to call.
614
252b5132
RH
615@kindex -g
616@item -g
617Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
618
2509a395
SL
619@kindex -G @var{value}
620@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 621@cindex object size
2509a395 622@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
623@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
624Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
625@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
626MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
627sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
628
629@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 630@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 631@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 632@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
633@itemx -soname=@var{name}
634When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
635the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
636which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
637linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
638field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
639
640@kindex -i
641@cindex incremental link
642@item -i
643Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
644
3dbf70a2 645@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
646@kindex -init=@var{name}
647@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
648When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
649executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
650of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
651function to call.
652
252b5132 653@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 654@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 655@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 656@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
657@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
658Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
659list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
660If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 661will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 662will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 663
ff5dcc92 664On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
665files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
666and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
667called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
668@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
669indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
670to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
671@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
672
673The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
674specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
675was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
676command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
677archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
678the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
679
ff5dcc92 680See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
681archives multiple times.
682
683You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
684
685@ifset GENERIC
686This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 687if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
688behaviour of the AIX linker.
689@end ifset
690
691@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 692@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 693@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 694@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 695@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
696Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
697for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
698option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
699in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
700on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 701@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
702order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
703how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
704option is specified.
252b5132 705
9c8ebd6a
DJ
706If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
707by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
708
252b5132
RH
709@ifset UsesEnvVars
710The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 711@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
712some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
713@end ifset
714
715The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
716@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
717at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
718
719@cindex emulation
720@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 721@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
722Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
723emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
724
725If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
726@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
727
728Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
729configured.
730
731@cindex link map
732@kindex -M
733@kindex --print-map
734@item -M
735@itemx --print-map
736Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
737information about the link, including the following:
738
739@itemize @bullet
740@item
3b83e13a 741Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
742@item
743How common symbols are allocated.
744@item
745All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
746which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
747@item
748The values assigned to symbols.
749
750Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
751involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
752have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
753linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
754of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
755the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
756linker script containing:
757
758@smallexample
759 foo = 1
760 foo = foo * 4
761 foo = foo + 8
762@end smallexample
763
764will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
765option is used:
766
767@smallexample
768 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
769 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
770 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
771@end smallexample
772
773See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
774scripts.
252b5132
RH
775@end itemize
776
777@kindex -n
778@cindex read-only text
779@cindex NMAGIC
780@kindex --nmagic
781@item -n
782@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
783Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
784libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
785mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
786
787@kindex -N
788@kindex --omagic
789@cindex read/write from cmd line
790@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 791@item -N
252b5132
RH
792@itemx --omagic
793Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
794not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
795libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
796mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
797is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
798specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
799
800@kindex --no-omagic
801@cindex OMAGIC
802@item --no-omagic
803This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
804sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
805be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
806shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
807
808@kindex -o @var{output}
809@kindex --output=@var{output}
810@cindex naming the output file
811@item -o @var{output}
812@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 813Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
814option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
815script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
816
817@kindex -O @var{level}
818@cindex generating optimized output
819@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 820If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 821the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
822should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
823option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
824the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
825no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
826of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 827
a712da20
NC
828@kindex -q
829@kindex --emit-relocs
830@cindex retain relocations in final executable
831@item -q
832@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 833Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
834Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
835order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
836in larger executables.
837
dbab7a7b
NC
838This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
839
4f471f39
RS
840@kindex --force-dynamic
841@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
842@item --force-dynamic
843Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
844to VxWorks targets.
845
252b5132
RH
846@cindex partial link
847@cindex relocatable output
848@kindex -r
1049f94e 849@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 850@item -r
1049f94e 851@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 852Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 853turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
854linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
855magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
856@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 857@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
858If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
859linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
860constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
861
62bf86b4
HPN
862When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
863partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
864relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
865example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
866with input files in other formats at all.
867
252b5132
RH
868This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
869
870@kindex -R @var{file}
871@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
872@cindex symbol-only input
873@item -R @var{filename}
874@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
875Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
876relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
877to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
878programs. You may use this option more than once.
879
ff5dcc92 880For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 881followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 882the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
883
884@kindex -s
885@kindex --strip-all
886@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 887@item -s
252b5132
RH
888@itemx --strip-all
889Omit all symbol information from the output file.
890
891@kindex -S
892@kindex --strip-debug
893@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 894@item -S
252b5132
RH
895@itemx --strip-debug
896Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
897
898@kindex -t
899@kindex --trace
900@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 901@item -t
252b5132 902@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 903Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
904
905@kindex -T @var{script}
906@kindex --script=@var{script}
907@cindex script files
908@item -T @var{scriptfile}
909@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
910Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 911@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 912@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
913output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
914the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
915specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
916options accumulate.
252b5132 917
14be8564
L
918@kindex -dT @var{script}
919@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
920@cindex script files
921@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
922@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
923Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
924
925This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
926processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
927command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
928@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
929behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
930command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
931the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
932@samp{gcc}).
933
252b5132
RH
934@kindex -u @var{symbol}
935@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
936@cindex undefined symbol
937@item -u @var{symbol}
938@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
939Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
940symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
941modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
942different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
943option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
944
945@kindex -Ur
946@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 947@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
948For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
949@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 950turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
951@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
952It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
953with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
954be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
955@samp{-r} for the others.
956
577a0623
AM
957@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
958@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
959Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
960@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
961missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
962specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
963multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
964input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
965in a linker script.
a854a4a7 966
252b5132
RH
967@kindex -v
968@kindex -V
969@kindex --version
970@cindex version
971@item -v
972@itemx --version
973@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 974Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
975lists the supported emulations.
976
977@kindex -x
978@kindex --discard-all
979@cindex deleting local symbols
980@item -x
981@itemx --discard-all
982Delete all local symbols.
983
984@kindex -X
985@kindex --discard-locals
986@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 987@item -X
252b5132 988@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
989Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
990system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
991or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
992
993@kindex -y @var{symbol}
994@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
995@cindex symbol tracing
996@item -y @var{symbol}
997@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
998Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
999option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1000to prepend an underscore.
1001
1002This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1003don't know where the reference is coming from.
1004
1005@kindex -Y @var{path}
1006@item -Y @var{path}
1007Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1008for Solaris compatibility.
1009
1010@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1011@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1012The recognized keywords are:
1013@table @samp
1014
1015@item combreloc
1016Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1017lookup caching possible.
1018
1019@item defs
560e09e9 1020Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1021shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1022
6aa29e7b
JJ
1023@item execstack
1024Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1025
cd6d6c15
NC
1026@item initfirst
1027This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1028It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1029before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1030the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1031the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1032objects.
1033
1034@item interpose
1035Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1036but the primary executable.
1037
5fa222e4
AM
1038@item lazy
1039When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1040dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1041the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1042Lazy binding is the default.
1043
cd6d6c15
NC
1044@item loadfltr
1045Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1046runtime.
1047
1048@item muldefs
1049Allows multiple definitions.
1050
1051@item nocombreloc
1052Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1053
1054@item nocopyreloc
1055Disables production of copy relocs.
1056
1057@item nodefaultlib
1058Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1059ignore any default library search paths.
1060
1061@item nodelete
1062Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1063
1064@item nodlopen
1065Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1066
1067@item nodump
1068Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1069
6aa29e7b
JJ
1070@item noexecstack
1071Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1072
1073@item norelro
1074Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1075
cd6d6c15
NC
1076@item now
1077When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1078dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1079when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1080deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1081first called.
1082
1083@item origin
1084Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1085
6aa29e7b
JJ
1086@item relro
1087Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1088
24718e3b
L
1089@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1090Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1091
1092@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1093Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1094
cd6d6c15
NC
1095@end table
1096
ece2d90e 1097Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1098
1099@kindex -(
1100@cindex groups of archives
1101@item -( @var{archives} -)
1102@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1103The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1104either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1105
1106The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1107references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1108the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1109archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1110object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1111would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1112they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1113resolved.
1114
1115Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1116it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1117more archives.
1118
69da35b5
NC
1119@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1120@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1121@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1122@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1123Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1124recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1125and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1126the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1127behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1128so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1129restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1130
4a43e768
AM
1131@kindex --as-needed
1132@kindex --no-as-needed
1133@item --as-needed
1134@itemx --no-as-needed
1135This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1136on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1137the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1138on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31
NC
1139needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1140emitted for a library that satisfies an undefined symbol reference
1141from a regular object file or, if the library is not found in the
1142DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries linked up to that point, an
1143undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
4a43e768
AM
1144@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1145
e56f61be
L
1146@kindex --add-needed
1147@kindex --no-add-needed
1148@item --add-needed
1149@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1150These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1151their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1152options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1153and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1154
252b5132
RH
1155@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1156@item -assert @var{keyword}
1157This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1158
1159@kindex -Bdynamic
1160@kindex -dy
1161@kindex -call_shared
1162@item -Bdynamic
1163@itemx -dy
1164@itemx -call_shared
1165Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1166for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1167default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1168for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1169multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1170@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1171
a1ab1d2a
UD
1172@kindex -Bgroup
1173@item -Bgroup
1174Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1175section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1176object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1177@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1178only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1179
252b5132
RH
1180@kindex -Bstatic
1181@kindex -dn
1182@kindex -non_shared
1183@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1184@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1185@itemx -dn
1186@itemx -non_shared
1187@itemx -static
1188Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1189platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1190variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1191may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1192library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1193option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1194option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1195shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1196references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1197libraries.
252b5132
RH
1198
1199@kindex -Bsymbolic
1200@item -Bsymbolic
1201When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1202definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1203for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1204within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1205platforms which support shared libraries.
1206
40b36307
L
1207@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1208@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1209When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1210symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1211This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1212libraries.
1213
55255dae
L
1214@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1215@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1216Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1217typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1218global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1219within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1220to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1221in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1222which support shared libraries.
1223
1224The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1225scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1226
40b36307
L
1227@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1228@item --dynamic-list-data
1229Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1230
1231@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1232@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1233Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1234is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1235
0b8a70d9
L
1236@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1237@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1238Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1239
252b5132
RH
1240@kindex --check-sections
1241@kindex --no-check-sections
1242@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1243@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1244Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1245been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1246perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1247suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1248allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1249restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1250Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1251force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1252option.
252b5132 1253
ddbb8a31
NC
1254@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1255@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1256@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1257@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1258This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1259by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1260command line. Normally the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1261output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1262input dynamic library. With @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}
1263specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1264follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries ignored. The default
1265behaviour can be restored with @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1266
1267This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1268libraries. With the default setting dynamic libraries mentioned on
1269the command line will be recursively searched, following their
1270DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1271required by the output binary. With
1272@option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries} specified however the searching
1273of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the dynamic
1274library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1275symbols.
1276
252b5132
RH
1277@cindex cross reference table
1278@kindex --cref
1279@item --cref
1280Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1281generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1282Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1283
1284The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1285easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1286sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1287symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1288definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1289
4818e05f
AM
1290@cindex common allocation
1291@kindex --no-define-common
1292@item --no-define-common
1293This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1294The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1295@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1296
1297The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1298the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1299of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1300forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1301Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1302from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1303This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1304and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1305duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1306paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1307
252b5132 1308@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1309@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1310@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1311Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1312address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1313times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1314limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1315context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1316symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1317constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1318using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1319Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1320space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1321@var{expression}.
1322
1323@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1324@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1325@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1326@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1327@itemx --no-demangle
1328These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1329and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1330present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1331underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1332mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1333different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1334to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1335demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1336is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1337
1338@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1339@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1340@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1341@item -I@var{file}
1342@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1343Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1344generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1345linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1346doing.
1347
7ce691ae 1348@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1349@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1350@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1351@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1352Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1353with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1354
252b5132
RH
1355@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1356@item --force-exe-suffix
1357Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1358
1359If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1360@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1361the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1362option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1363Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1364it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1365
1366@kindex --gc-sections
1367@kindex --no-gc-sections
1368@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1369@item --gc-sections
1370@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1371Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1372targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1373performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1374@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1375
d5465ba2
AM
1376@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1377examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1378symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1379command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1380referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1381libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1382referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1383the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1384relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1385
ac69cbc6 1386This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
fc073cb7 1387@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1388specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1389a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1390
c17d87de
NC
1391@kindex --print-gc-sections
1392@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1393@cindex garbage collection
1394@item --print-gc-sections
1395@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1396List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1397printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1398collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1399default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1400be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1401line.
1402
252b5132
RH
1403@cindex help
1404@cindex usage
1405@kindex --help
1406@item --help
1407Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1408
ea20a7da
CC
1409@kindex --target-help
1410@item --target-help
1411Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1412
2509a395
SL
1413@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1414@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1415Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1416@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1417
1418@cindex memory usage
1419@kindex --no-keep-memory
1420@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1421@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1422symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1423instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1424necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1425while linking a large executable.
1426
1427@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1428@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1429@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1430@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1431Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1432is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1433The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1434behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1435libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1436
aa713662
L
1437@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1438@kindex -z muldefs
1439@item --allow-multiple-definition
1440@itemx -z muldefs
1441Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1442report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1443first definition will be used.
1444
b79e8c78 1445@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1446@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1447@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1448@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1449Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1450This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1451determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1452shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1453how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1454
903249d7
NC
1455The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1456referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1457an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1458a shared library.
1459
1460The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1461libraries specified at link time are that:
1462
1463@itemize @bullet
1464@item
1465A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1466that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1467resolvable at load time.
1468@item
1469There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1470symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1471
1472The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1473select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1474architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1475appropriate memset function.
1476@end itemize
b79e8c78 1477
31941635
L
1478@kindex --no-undefined-version
1479@item --no-undefined-version
1480Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1481it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1482will be issued instead.
1483
3e3b46e5
PB
1484@kindex --default-symver
1485@item --default-symver
1486Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1487exported symbols.
1488
1489@kindex --default-imported-symver
1490@item --default-imported-symver
1491Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1492imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1493
252b5132
RH
1494@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1495@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1496Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1497files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1498been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1499This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1500errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1501have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1502inappropriate.
1503
fe7929ce
AM
1504@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1505@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1506Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1507library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1508
252b5132
RH
1509@kindex --no-whole-archive
1510@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1511Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1512archive files.
1513
1514@cindex output file after errors
1515@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1516@item --noinhibit-exec
1517Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1518Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1519errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1520when it issues any error whatsoever.
1521
0a9c1c8e
CD
1522@kindex -nostdlib
1523@item -nostdlib
1524Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1525command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1526(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1527
252b5132 1528@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1529@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1530@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1531@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1532file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1533@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1534object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1535object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1536should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1537usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1538name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1539list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1540command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1541this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1542@end ifclear
1543
36af4a4e
JJ
1544@kindex -pie
1545@kindex --pic-executable
1546@item -pie
1547@itemx --pic-executable
1548@cindex position independent executables
1549Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1550ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1551libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1552address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1553normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1554defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1555
252b5132
RH
1556@kindex -qmagic
1557@item -qmagic
1558This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1559
1560@kindex -Qy
1561@item -Qy
1562This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1563
1564@kindex --relax
1565@cindex synthesizing linker
1566@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1567@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1568@item --relax
28d5f677 1569@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1570An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1571@ifset GENERIC
1572This option is only supported on a few targets.
1573@end ifset
1574@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1575@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1576@end ifset
1577@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1578@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1579@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1580@ifset XTENSA
1581@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1582@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1583@ifset M68HC11
1584@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1585@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1586@ifset POWERPC
1587@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1588@end ifset
252b5132 1589
28d5f677
NC
1590On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1591global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1592addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1593synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1594instructions, and combinig constant values.
252b5132
RH
1595
1596On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1597debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1598@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1599This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1600family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1601@end ifset
1602
1603@ifset GENERIC
1604On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1605but ignored.
1606@end ifset
1607
28d5f677
NC
1608On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1609@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1610
252b5132
RH
1611@cindex retaining specified symbols
1612@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1613@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1614@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1615@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1616Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1617discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1618symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1619@ifset GENERIC
1620(such as VxWorks)
1621@end ifset
1622where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1623run-time memory.
1624
1625@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1626or symbols needed for relocations.
1627
1628You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1629line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1630
1631@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1632@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1633@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1634@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1635Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1636linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1637arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1638them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1639also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1640objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1641@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1642ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1643@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1644
ff5dcc92 1645The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1646SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1647@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1648runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1649options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1650gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1651file systems.
252b5132 1652
ff5dcc92 1653For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1654followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1655the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1656@end ifset
1657
1658@ifset GENERIC
1659@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1660@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1661@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1662When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1663happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1664of the input files.
1665
1666When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1667non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1668shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1669explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1670specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1671@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1672either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1673appearing multiple times.
1674
28c309a2
NC
1675This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1676that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1677is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1678runtime linker would do.
1679
252b5132 1680The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1681libraries:
252b5132
RH
1682@enumerate
1683@item
ff5dcc92 1684Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1685@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1686Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1687between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1688specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1689used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1690at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1691by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1692the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1693@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1694On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1695@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1696environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1697@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1698On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1699directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1700@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1701For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1702variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1703@item
ec4eb78a
L
1704For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1705@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1706libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1707@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1708@item
252b5132
RH
1709The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1710@item
1711For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1712exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1713@end enumerate
1714
1715If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1716warning and continue with the link.
1717@end ifset
1718
1719@kindex -shared
1720@kindex -Bshareable
1721@item -shared
1722@itemx -Bshareable
1723@cindex shared libraries
1724Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1725and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1726shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1727undefined symbols in the link.
1728
252b5132 1729@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1730@item --sort-common
1731@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1732@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1733This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1734ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1735sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1736eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1737between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1738specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1739
2509a395
SL
1740@kindex --sort-section=name
1741@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1742This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1743patterns in the linker script.
1744
2509a395
SL
1745@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1746@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1747This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1748patterns in the linker script.
1749
252b5132 1750@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1751@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1752Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1753each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1754size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1755
1756@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1757@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1758Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1759output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1760This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1761certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1762cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1763that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1764support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1765input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1766more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1767many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1768
1769@kindex --stats
1770@item --stats
1771Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1772as execution time and memory usage.
1773
2509a395 1774@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1775@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1776Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1777configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1778that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1779
252b5132
RH
1780@kindex --traditional-format
1781@cindex traditional format
1782@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1783For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1784the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1785use the traditional format instead.
1786
1787@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1788For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1789symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1790full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1791@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1792trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1793combine duplicate entries.
1794
2509a395
SL
1795@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1796@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1797Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1798address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1799times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1800line.
1801@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1802for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1803@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1804should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1805sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1806
2509a395
SL
1807@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1808@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1809@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1810@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1811@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1812@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1813@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1814Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1815@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1816
2509a395
SL
1817@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1818@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1819@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1820When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1821of the first byte of the text segment.
1822
560e09e9
NC
1823@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1824@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1825Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1826values for @samp{method}:
1827
1828@table @samp
1829@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1830Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1831
1832@item report-all
da8bce14 1833Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1834
1835@item ignore-in-object-files
1836Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1837ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1838
1839@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1840Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1841ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1842when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1843libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1844command line.
1845@end table
1846
1847The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1848by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1849
1850Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1851unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1852can change this to a warning.
1853
252b5132
RH
1854@kindex --verbose
1855@cindex verbose
1856@item --dll-verbose
308b1ffd 1857@itemx --verbose
ff5dcc92 1858Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1859supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
b9a8de1e 1860the linker script being used by the linker.
252b5132
RH
1861
1862@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1863@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1864@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1865Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1866used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1867about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1868is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1869see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1870use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1871symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1872@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1873
7ce691ae 1874@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1875@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1876@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1877@item --warn-common
1878Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1879a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1880but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1881you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1882Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1883warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1884
1885There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1886
1887@table @samp
1888@item int i = 1;
1889A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1890file.
1891
1892@item extern int i;
1893An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1894There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1895variable somewhere.
1896
1897@item int i;
1898A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1899variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1900The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1901single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1902size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1903a definition of the same variable.
1904@end table
1905
1906The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1907Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1908just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1909encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1910a common symbol.
1911
1912@enumerate
1913@item
1914Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1915definition for the symbol.
1916@smallexample
1917@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1918 overridden by definition
1919@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1920@end smallexample
1921
1922@item
1923Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1924the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1925except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1926@smallexample
1927@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1928 overriding common
1929@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1930@end smallexample
1931
1932@item
1933Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1934@smallexample
1935@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1936 of `@var{symbol}'
1937@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1938@end smallexample
1939
1940@item
1941Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1942@smallexample
1943@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1944 overridden by larger common
1945@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1946@end smallexample
1947
1948@item
1949Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1950the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1951encountered in a different order.
1952@smallexample
1953@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1954 overriding smaller common
1955@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1956@end smallexample
1957@end enumerate
1958
1959@kindex --warn-constructors
1960@item --warn-constructors
1961Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1962object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1963detect the use of global constructors.
1964
1965@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1966@item --warn-multiple-gp
1967Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1968This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1969Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1970section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1971of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1972base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1973base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1974bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1975large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1976values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1977option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1978
1979@kindex --warn-once
1980@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1981@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1982@item --warn-once
1983Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1984which refers to it.
1985
1986@kindex --warn-section-align
1987@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1988@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1989@item --warn-section-align
1990Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1991alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1992The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1993is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1994the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1995
8fdd7217
NC
1996@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1997@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 1998Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 1999
a0c402a5
L
2000@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2001@item --warn-alternate-em
2002Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2003
560e09e9
NC
2004@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2005@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2006If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2007@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2008This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2009
2010@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2011@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2012This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2013it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2014
252b5132
RH
2015@kindex --whole-archive
2016@cindex including an entire archive
2017@item --whole-archive
2018For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2019@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2020in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2021files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2022library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2023library. This option may be used more than once.
2024
7ec229ce 2025Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2026about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2027Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2028list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2029your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2030
2509a395
SL
2031@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2032@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2033Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2034@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2035undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2036@var{symbol}.
2037
2038This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2039wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2040wishes to call the system function, it should call
2041@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2042
2043Here is a trivial example:
2044
2045@smallexample
2046void *
cc2f008e 2047__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2048@{
cc2f008e 2049 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2050 return __real_malloc (c);
2051@}
2052@end smallexample
2053
ff5dcc92 2054If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2055all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2056instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2057call the real @code{malloc} function.
2058
2059You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2060links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2061you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2062file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2063call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2064
6aa29e7b
JJ
2065@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2066@item --eh-frame-hdr
2067Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2068@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2069
6c1439be
L
2070@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2071@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2072@item --enable-new-dtags
2073@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2074This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2075systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
2076@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2077If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2078created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2079those options are only available for ELF systems.
2080
2d643429 2081@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2082@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2083Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2084close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2085time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2086increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2087value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2088
fdc90cb4
JJ
2089@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2090@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2091Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2092@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2093new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2094the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2095hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2096
35835446
JR
2097@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2098@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2099This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2100linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2101for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2102about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2103
4f9c04f7 2104Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21051021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2106run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2107has been used.
2108
2109The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2110enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2111
c0065db7
RM
2112@kindex --build-id
2113@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2114@item --build-id
2115@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2116Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2117The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2118file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2119@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2120parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2121@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2122@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2123an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2124characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2125omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2126
2127The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2128that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2129unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2130to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2131file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2132string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2133
2134Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2135@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2136@end table
2137
0285c67d
NC
2138@c man end
2139
36f63dca 2140@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2141
0285c67d
NC
2142@c man begin OPTIONS
2143
ff5dcc92 2144The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2145the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2146normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2147use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2148@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2149like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2150symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2151object file).
2152
2153In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2154support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2155PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2156values by either a space or an equals sign.
2157
ff5dcc92 2158@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2159
2160@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2161@item --add-stdcall-alias
2162If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2163as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2164[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2165
2166@kindex --base-file
2167@item --base-file @var{file}
2168Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2169addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2170@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2171[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2172
2173@kindex --dll
2174@item --dll
2175Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2176@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2177file.
bb10df36 2178[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2179
88183869
DK
2180@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2181@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2182@item --enable-long-section-names
2183@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2184The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2185the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2186for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2187fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2188to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2189allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2190disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2191generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2192as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
3efd345c
DK
2193with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2194GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2195information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2196option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2197section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2198when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2199image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2200[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2201
252b5132
RH
2202@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2203@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2204@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2205@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2206If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2207do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2208only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2209resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2210undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2211@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2212to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2213warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2214import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2215to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2216feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2217@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2218mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2219[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2220
522f09cd
KT
2221@kindex --leading-underscore
2222@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2223@item --leading-underscore
2224@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2225For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2226in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2227disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2228
252b5132
RH
2229@cindex DLLs, creating
2230@kindex --export-all-symbols
2231@item --export-all-symbols
2232If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2233be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2234otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2235explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2236attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2237option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2238@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2239@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2240exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2241re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2242such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2243@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2244@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2245Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2246not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2247extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2248(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2249These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2250@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2251@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2252@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2253@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2254[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2255
2256@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2257@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2258Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2259exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2260[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2261
2927aaca
NC
2262@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2263@item --exclude-all-symbols
2264Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2265[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2266
252b5132
RH
2267@kindex --file-alignment
2268@item --file-alignment
2269Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2270file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2271512.
bb10df36 2272[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2273
2274@cindex heap size
2275@kindex --heap
2276@item --heap @var{reserve}
2277@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2278Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2279to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2280committed.
bb10df36 2281[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2282
2283@cindex image base
2284@kindex --image-base
2285@item --image-base @var{value}
2286Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2287the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2288is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2289your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2290other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2291for dlls.
bb10df36 2292[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2293
2294@kindex --kill-at
2295@item --kill-at
2296If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2297symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2298[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2299
26d2d8a2
BF
2300@kindex --large-address-aware
2301@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2302If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2303header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2304greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2305or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2306section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2307[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2308
252b5132
RH
2309@kindex --major-image-version
2310@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2311Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2312[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2313
2314@kindex --major-os-version
2315@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2316Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2317[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2318
2319@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2320@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2321Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2322[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2323
2324@kindex --minor-image-version
2325@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2326Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2327[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2328
2329@kindex --minor-os-version
2330@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2331Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2332[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2333
2334@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2335@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2336Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2337[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2338
2339@cindex DEF files, creating
2340@cindex DLLs, creating
2341@kindex --output-def
2342@item --output-def @var{file}
2343The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2344file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2345(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2346library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2347automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2348[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2349
b044cda1
CW
2350@cindex DLLs, creating
2351@kindex --out-implib
2352@item --out-implib @var{file}
2353The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2354import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2355import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2356may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2357makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2358creation step.
bb10df36 2359[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2360
2361@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2362@item --enable-auto-image-base
2363Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2364using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2365from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2366collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2367avoided.
bb10df36 2368[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2369
2370@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2371@item --disable-auto-image-base
2372Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2373user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2374default.
bb10df36 2375[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2376
2377@cindex DLLs, linking to
2378@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2379@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2380When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2381search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2382@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2383between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2384uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2385@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2386[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2387
2388@kindex --enable-auto-import
2389@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2390Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2391DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2392building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2393'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2394to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2395specification published by Microsoft.
2396
e2a83dd0
NC
2397Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2398data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2399placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2400around a problem with consts that is described here:
2401http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2402
4d8907ac
DS
2403Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2404see this message:
0d888aac 2405
ece2d90e 2406"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2407documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2408
ece2d90e
NC
2409This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2410ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2411allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2412fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2413constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2414multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2415this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2416of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2417the warning, and exit.
2418
2419There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2420data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2421
2fa9fc65
NC
2422One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2423of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2424this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2425
c0065db7
RM
2426A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2427that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2428there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2429a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2430
2431@example
2432extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2433extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2434 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2435@end example
2436
2437or
2438
2439@example
2440extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2441extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2442 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2443@end example
2444
c0065db7 2445For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2446is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2447
2448@example
2449extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2450extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2451 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2452@end example
2453
c406afaf
NC
2454or
2455
2456@example
2457extern long long extern_ll;
2458extern_ll -->
2459 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2460@end example
2461
2fa9fc65 2462A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2463'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2464@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2465requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2466building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2467merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2468between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2469constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2470
2471Original:
2472@example
2473--foo.h
2474extern int arr[];
2475--foo.c
2476#include "foo.h"
2477void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2478 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2479@}
2480@end example
2481
2482Solution 1:
2483@example
2484--foo.h
2485extern int arr[];
2486--foo.c
2487#include "foo.h"
2488void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2489 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2490 volatile int *parr = arr;
2491 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2492@}
2493@end example
2494
2495Solution 2:
2496@example
2497--foo.h
2498/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2499#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2500 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2501#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2502#else
2503#define FOO_IMPORT
2504#endif
2505extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2506--foo.c
2507#include "foo.h"
2508void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2509 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2510@}
2511@end example
2512
c0065db7 2513A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2514library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2515for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2516functions).
bb10df36 2517[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2518
2519@kindex --disable-auto-import
2520@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2521Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2522@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2523[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2524
2fa9fc65
NC
2525@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2526@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2527If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2528that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2529a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2530environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2531[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2532
2533@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2534@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2535Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2536DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2537[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2538
b044cda1
CW
2539@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2540@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2541Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2542[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2543
252b5132
RH
2544@kindex --section-alignment
2545@item --section-alignment
2546Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2547addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2548[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2549
2550@cindex stack size
2551@kindex --stack
2552@item --stack @var{reserve}
2553@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2554Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2555to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2556committed.
bb10df36 2557[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2558
2559@kindex --subsystem
2560@item --subsystem @var{which}
2561@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2562@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2563Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2564legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2565@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2566the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2567@var{which}.
bb10df36 2568[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2569
2f563b51
DK
2570The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2571of the PE file header:
2572[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2573
2574@kindex --dynamicbase
2575@item --dynamicbase
2576The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2577randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2578Vista for i386 PE targets.
2579
2580@kindex --forceinteg
2581@item --forceinteg
2582Code integrity checks are enforced.
2583
2584@kindex --nxcompat
2585@item --nxcompat
2586The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2587This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2588
2589@kindex --no-isolation
2590@item --no-isolation
2591Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2592
2593@kindex --no-seh
2594@item --no-seh
2595The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2596this image.
2597
2598@kindex --no-bind
2599@item --no-bind
2600Do not bind this image.
2601
2602@kindex --wdmdriver
2603@item --wdmdriver
2604The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2605
2606@kindex --tsaware
2607@item --tsaware
2608The image is Terminal Server aware.
2609
252b5132
RH
2610@end table
2611
0285c67d
NC
2612@c man end
2613
93fd0973
SC
2614@ifset M68HC11
2615@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2616
2617@c man begin OPTIONS
2618
2619The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2620memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2621
2622@table @gcctabopt
2623
2624@kindex --no-trampoline
2625@item --no-trampoline
2626This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2627is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2628instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2629
2630@kindex --bank-window
2631@item --bank-window @var{name}
2632This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2633the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2634The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2635paging and addresses within the memory window.
2636
2637@end table
2638
2639@c man end
2640@end ifset
2641
7fb9f789
NC
2642@ifset M68K
2643@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2644
2645@c man begin OPTIONS
2646
2647The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2648when linking for 68K targets.
2649
2650@table @gcctabopt
2651
2652@kindex --got
2653@item --got=@var{type}
2654This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2655@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2656@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2657Info entry for @file{ld}.
2658
2659@end table
2660
2661@c man end
2662@end ifset
2663
252b5132
RH
2664@ifset UsesEnvVars
2665@node Environment
2666@section Environment Variables
2667
0285c67d
NC
2668@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2669
560e09e9 2670You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2671@ifclear SingleFormat
2672@code{GNUTARGET},
2673@end ifclear
2674@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2675
36f63dca 2676@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2677@kindex GNUTARGET
2678@cindex default input format
2679@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2680use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2681of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2682@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2683of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2684attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2685this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2686there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2687object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2688BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2689in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2690@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2691
2692@kindex LDEMULATION
2693@cindex default emulation
2694@cindex emulation, default
2695@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2696@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2697behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2698available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2699the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2700variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2701linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2702
2703@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2704@cindex demangling, default
2705Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2706@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2707default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2708a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2709may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2710options.
2711
0285c67d
NC
2712@c man end
2713@end ifset
2714
252b5132
RH
2715@node Scripts
2716@chapter Linker Scripts
2717
2718@cindex scripts
2719@cindex linker scripts
2720@cindex command files
2721Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2722written in the linker command language.
2723
2724The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2725the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2726the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2727more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2728direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2729described below.
2730
2731The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2732yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2733linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2734to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2735such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2736
2737You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2738line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2739default linker script.
2740
2741You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2742to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2743Linker Scripts}.
2744
2745@menu
2746* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2747* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2748* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2749* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2750* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2751* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2752* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2753* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2754* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2755* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2756* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2757@end menu
2758
2759@node Basic Script Concepts
2760@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2761@cindex linker script concepts
2762We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2763describe the linker script language.
2764
2765The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2766file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2767@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2768The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2769purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2770among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2771section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2772in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2773
2774Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2775also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2776contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2777the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2778A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2779area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2780loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2781which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2782of debugging information.
2783
2784Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2785first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2786the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2787@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2788section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2789same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2790is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2791(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2792based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2793RAM address would be the VMA.
2794
2795You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2796program with the @samp{-h} option.
2797
2798Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2799@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2800has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2801information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2802will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2803static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2804referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2805
2806You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2807program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2808option.
2809
2810@node Script Format
2811@section Linker Script Format
2812@cindex linker script format
2813Linker scripts are text files.
2814
2815You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2816either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2817symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2818generally ignored.
2819
2820Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2821If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2822otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2823double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2824file name.
2825
2826You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2827@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2828to whitespace.
2829
2830@node Simple Example
2831@section Simple Linker Script Example
2832@cindex linker script example
2833@cindex example of linker script
2834Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2835
2836The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2837@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2838memory layout of the output file.
2839
2840The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2841describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2842code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2843@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2844Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2845your input files.
2846
2847For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
28480x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2849linker script which will do that:
2850@smallexample
2851SECTIONS
2852@{
2853 . = 0x10000;
2854 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2855 . = 0x8000000;
2856 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2857 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2858@}
2859@end smallexample
2860
2861You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2862followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2863descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2864
252b5132
RH
2865The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2866sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2867counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2868other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2869current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2870incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2871@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2872
2873The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2874required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2875after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2876which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2877wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2878means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2879
2880Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2881@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2882@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2883
2884The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2885the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2886at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2887output section, the value of the location counter will be
2888@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2889effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2890immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2891
2892The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2893alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2894example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2895sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2896may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2897sections.
2898
2899That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2900
2901@node Simple Commands
2902@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2903@cindex linker script simple commands
2904In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2905
2906@menu
2907* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2908* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2909@ifclear SingleFormat
2910* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2911@end ifclear
2912
4a93e180 2913* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
2914* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2915@end menu
2916
2917@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2918@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2919@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2920@cindex start of execution
2921@cindex first instruction
2922@cindex entry point
2923The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2924point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2925entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2926@smallexample
2927ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2928@end smallexample
2929
2930There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2931entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2932stopping when one of them succeeds:
2933@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2934@item
252b5132 2935the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2936@item
252b5132 2937the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2938@item
3ab904c4
NC
2939the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
2940targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
2941check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 2942@item
252b5132 2943the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2944@item
252b5132
RH
2945The address @code{0}.
2946@end itemize
2947
2948@node File Commands
36f63dca 2949@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2950@cindex linker script file commands
2951Several linker script commands deal with files.
2952
2953@table @code
2954@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2955@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2956@cindex including a linker script
2957Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2958be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 2959with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
296010 levels deep.
2961
4006703d
NS
2962You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
2963@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
2964
252b5132
RH
2965@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2966@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2967@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2968@cindex input files in linker scripts
2969@cindex input object files in linker scripts
2970@cindex linker script input object files
2971The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
2972in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2973
2974For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
2975a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
2976then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
2977
2978In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
2979script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
2980
e3f2db7f
AO
2981In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
2982with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
2983located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
2984for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
2985open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
2986linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
2987description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 2988
ff5dcc92 2989If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
2990name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
2991@samp{-l}.
2992
2993When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
2994files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2995script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
2996
2997@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2998@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2999@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3000@cindex grouping input files
3001The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3002files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3003new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3004in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3005
b717d30e
JJ
3006@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3007@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3008@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3009This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3010commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3011as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3012with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3013when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3014@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3015and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3016setting afterwards.
3017
252b5132
RH
3018@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3019@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3020@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3021The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3022@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3023@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3024Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3025precedence.
3026
3027You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3028output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3029
3030@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3031@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3032@cindex library search path in linker script
3033@cindex archive search path in linker script
3034@cindex search path in linker script
3035The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3036@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3037@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3038on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3039are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3040the command line option are searched first.
3041
3042@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3043@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3044@cindex first input file
3045The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3046that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3047though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3048when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3049first file.
3050@end table
3051
3052@ifclear SingleFormat
3053@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3054@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3055A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3056
3057@table @code
3058@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3059@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3060@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3061@cindex output file format in linker script
3062The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3063output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3064exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3065(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3066line option takes precedence.
3067
3068You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3069formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3070This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3071desired endianness.
3072
3073If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3074will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3075output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3076used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3077
3078For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3079command:
3080@smallexample
3081OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3082@end smallexample
3083This says that the default format for the output file is
3084@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3085option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3086format.
3087
3088@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3089@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3090@cindex input file format in linker script
3091The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3092files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3093This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3094(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3095is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3096command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3097@end table
3098@end ifclear
3099
4a93e180
NC
3100@node REGION_ALIAS
3101@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3102@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3103@cindex region alias
3104@cindex region names
3105
3106Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3107@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3108
3109@smallexample
3110REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3111@end smallexample
3112
3113The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3114memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3115to memory regions. An example follows.
3116
3117Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3118memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3119that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3120non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3121access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3122read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3123sections:
3124
3125@itemize @bullet
3126@item
3127@code{.text} program code;
3128@item
3129@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3130@item
3131@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3132@item
3133@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3134@end itemize
3135
3136The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3137part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3138output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3139systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3140@code{C}:
3141@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3142@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3143@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3144@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3145@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3146@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3147@end multitable
3148The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3149loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3150the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3151the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3152
3153The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3154includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3155memory layout:
3156@smallexample
3157INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3158
3159SECTIONS
3160 @{
3161 .text :
3162 @{
3163 *(.text)
3164 @} > REGION_TEXT
3165 .rodata :
3166 @{
3167 *(.rodata)
3168 rodata_end = .;
3169 @} > REGION_RODATA
3170 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3171 @{
3172 data_start = .;
3173 *(.data)
3174 @} > REGION_DATA
3175 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3176 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3177 .bss :
3178 @{
3179 *(.bss)
3180 @} > REGION_BSS
3181 @}
3182@end smallexample
3183
3184Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3185regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3186variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3187@table @code
3188@item A
3189Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3190@smallexample
3191MEMORY
3192 @{
3193 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3194 @}
3195
3196REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3197REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3198REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3199REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3200@end smallexample
3201@item B
3202Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3203into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3204@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3205@smallexample
3206MEMORY
3207 @{
3208 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3209 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3210 @}
3211
3212REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3213REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3214REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3215REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3216@end smallexample
3217@item C
3218Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3219@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3220initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3221system start into the @code{RAM}.
3222@smallexample
3223MEMORY
3224 @{
3225 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3226 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3227 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3228 @}
3229
3230REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3231REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3232REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3233REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3234@end smallexample
3235@end table
3236
3237It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3238@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3239necessary:
3240@smallexample
3241#include <string.h>
3242
3243extern char data_start [];
3244extern char data_size [];
3245extern char data_load_start [];
3246
3247void copy_data(void)
3248@{
3249 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3250 @{
3251 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3252 @}
3253@}
3254@end smallexample
3255
252b5132 3256@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3257@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3258There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3259
3260@table @code
3261@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3262@kindex ASSERT
3263@cindex assertion in linker script
3264Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3265with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3266
3267@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3268@kindex EXTERN
3269@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3270Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3271symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3272modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3273each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3274command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3275
3276@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3277@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3278@cindex common allocation in linker script
3279This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3280to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3281output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3282
4818e05f
AM
3283@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3284@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3285@cindex common allocation in linker script
3286This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3287command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3288to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3289
53d25da6
AM
3290@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3291@kindex INSERT
3292@cindex insert user script into default script
3293This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3294augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3295inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3296@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3297default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3298sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3299linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3300insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3301linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3302default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3303of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3304to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3305is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3306
3307@smallexample
3308SECTIONS
3309@{
3310 OVERLAY :
3311 @{
3312 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3313 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3314 @}
3315@}
3316INSERT AFTER .text;
3317@end smallexample
3318
252b5132
RH
3319@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3320@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3321@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3322This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3323references among certain output sections.
3324
3325In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3326using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3327will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3328errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3329a function defined in the other section.
3330
3331The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3332@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3333an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3334@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3335names.
3336
3337@ifclear SingleFormat
3338@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3339@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3340@cindex machine architecture
3341@cindex architecture
3342Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3343of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3344architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3345the @samp{-f} option.
3346@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3347
3348@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3349@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3350This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3351@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3352in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3353@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3354@end table
3355
3356@node Assignments
3357@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3358@cindex assignment in scripts
3359@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3360@cindex variables, defining
3361You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3362the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3363
3364@menu
3365* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3366* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3367* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3368* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3369@end menu
3370
3371@node Simple Assignments
3372@subsection Simple Assignments
3373
3374You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3375
3376@table @code
3377@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3378@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3379@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3380@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3381@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3382@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3383@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3384@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3385@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3386@end table
3387
3388The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3389@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3390defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3391
3392The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3393may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3394
3395The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3396
3397Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3398
3399You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3400statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3401section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3402
3403The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3404expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3405
3406Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3407assignments may be used:
3408
3409@smallexample
3410floating_point = 0;
3411SECTIONS
3412@{
3413 .text :
3414 @{
3415 *(.text)
3416 _etext = .;
3417 @}
156e34dd 3418 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3419 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3420@}
3421@end smallexample
3422@noindent
3423In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3424zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3425the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3426defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3427upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3428
3429@node PROVIDE
3430@subsection PROVIDE
3431@cindex PROVIDE
3432In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3433only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3434the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3435@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3436@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3437@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3438@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3439@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3440
3441Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3442@smallexample
3443SECTIONS
3444@{
3445 .text :
3446 @{
3447 *(.text)
3448 _etext = .;
3449 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3450 @}
3451@}
3452@end smallexample
3453
3454In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3455underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3456the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3457underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3458If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3459linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3460
7af8e998
L
3461@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3462@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3463@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3464Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3465hidden and won't be exported.
3466
73ae6183
NC
3467@node Source Code Reference
3468@subsection Source Code Reference
3469
3470Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3471intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3472a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3473symbol that does not have a value.
3474
3475Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3476transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3477stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3478prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3479mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3480of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3481variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3482linker script variable might be referred to as:
3483
3484@smallexample
3485 extern int foo;
3486@end smallexample
3487
3488But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3489
3490@smallexample
3491 _foo = 1000;
3492@end smallexample
3493
3494In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3495transformation has taken place.
3496
3497When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3498things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3499in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3500second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3501table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3502contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3503value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3504
3505@smallexample
3506 int foo = 1000;
3507@end smallexample
3508
3509creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3510holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3511number 1000 is initially stored.
3512
3513When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3514first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3515memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3516So:
3517
3518@smallexample
3519 foo = 1;
3520@end smallexample
3521
3522looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3523associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3524address. Whereas:
3525
3526@smallexample
3527 int * a = & foo;
3528@end smallexample
3529
3530looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3531and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3532the variable @samp{a}.
3533
3534Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3535the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3536an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3537
3538@smallexample
3539 foo = 1000;
3540@end smallexample
3541
3542creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3543the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3544address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3545linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3546access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3547
3548Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3549you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3550use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3551section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3552linker script contains these declarations:
3553
3554@smallexample
3555@group
3556 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3557 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3558 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3559@end group
3560@end smallexample
3561
3562Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3563
3564@smallexample
3565@group
3566 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3567
73ae6183
NC
3568 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3569@end group
3570@end smallexample
3571
3572Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3573
252b5132 3574@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3575@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3576@kindex SECTIONS
3577The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3578into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3579
3580The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3581@smallexample
3582SECTIONS
3583@{
3584 @var{sections-command}
3585 @var{sections-command}
3586 @dots{}
3587@}
3588@end smallexample
3589
3590Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3591
3592@itemize @bullet
3593@item
3594an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3595@item
3596a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3597@item
3598an output section description
3599@item
3600an overlay description
3601@end itemize
3602
3603The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3604@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3605those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3606understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3607the layout of the output file.
3608
3609Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3610below.
3611
3612If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3613linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3614section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3615input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3616example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3617in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3618
3619@menu
3620* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3621* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3622* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3623* Input Section:: Input section description
3624* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3625* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3626* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3627* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3628* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3629@end menu
3630
3631@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3632@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3633The full description of an output section looks like this:
3634@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3635@group
7e7d5768 3636@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
3637 [AT(@var{lma})]
3638 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3639 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3640 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3641 @{
3642 @var{output-section-command}
3643 @var{output-section-command}
3644 @dots{}
562d3460 3645 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3646@end group
3647@end smallexample
3648
3649Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3650
3651The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3652name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3653The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3654
3655Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3656
3657@itemize @bullet
3658@item
3659a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3660@item
3661an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3662@item
3663data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3664@item
3665a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3666@end itemize
3667
3668@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3669@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3670@cindex name, section
3671@cindex section name
3672The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3673meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3674support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3675must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3676example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3677output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3678names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3679quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3680characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3681commas must be quoted.
3682
3683The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3684Discarding}.
3685
3686@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3687@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3688@cindex address, section
3689@cindex section address
3690The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3691address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3692is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3693
3694If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3695section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3696to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3697alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3698contained within the output section.
3699
3700The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3701
3702@itemize @bullet
3703@item
3704If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3705is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3706in that region.
3707
3708@item
3709If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3710regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3711section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3712be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3713
3714@item
3715If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3716the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3717counter.
3718@end itemize
3719
3720@noindent
3721For example:
3722
252b5132
RH
3723@smallexample
3724.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3725@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3726
252b5132
RH
3727@noindent
3728and
ea5cae92 3729
252b5132
RH
3730@smallexample
3731.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3732@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3733
252b5132
RH
3734@noindent
3735are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3736@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3737counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3738counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3739input sections.
252b5132
RH
3740
3741The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3742For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3743so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3744do something like this:
3745@smallexample
3746.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3747@end smallexample
3748@noindent
3749This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3750aligned upward to the specified value.
3751
3752Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3753location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3754sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3755
3756@node Input Section
36f63dca 3757@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3758@cindex input sections
3759@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3760The most common output section command is an input section description.
3761
3762The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3763You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3764in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3765map the input files into your memory layout.
3766
3767@menu
3768* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3769* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3770* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3771* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3772* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3773@end menu
3774
3775@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3776@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3777@cindex input section basics
3778An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3779by a list of section names in parentheses.
3780
3781The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3782describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3783
3784The most common input section description is to include all input
3785sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3786include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3787@smallexample
3788*(.text)
3789@end smallexample
3790@noindent
18625d54
CM
3791Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3792of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3793match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3794example:
252b5132 3795@smallexample
b4346c09 3796*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3797@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3798will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3799@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3800
3801There are two ways to include more than one section:
3802@smallexample
3803*(.text .rdata)
3804*(.text) *(.rdata)
3805@end smallexample
3806@noindent
3807The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3808@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3809first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3810they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3811@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3812@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3813
3814You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3815You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3816needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3817@smallexample
3818data.o(.data)
3819@end smallexample
3820
967928e9
AM
3821You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3822matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3823with no whitespace around the colon.
3824
3825@table @samp
3826@item archive:file
3827matches file within archive
3828@item archive:
3829matches the whole archive
3830@item :file
3831matches file but not one in an archive
3832@end table
3833
3834Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3835wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3836single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3837@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3838within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3839also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3840other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3841from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3842command.
3843
252b5132
RH
3844If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3845the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3846commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3847@smallexample
3848data.o
3849@end smallexample
3850
967928e9
AM
3851When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3852and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3853characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3854name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3855did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3856though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3857@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3858the archive search path.
3859
3860@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3861@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3862@cindex input section wildcards
3863@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3864@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3865@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3866In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3867name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3868
3869The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3870pattern for the file name.
3871
3872The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3873
3874@table @samp
3875@item *
3876matches any number of characters
3877@item ?
3878matches any single character
3879@item [@var{chars}]
3880matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3881character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3882@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3883@item \
3884quotes the following character
3885@end table
3886
3887When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3888will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3889Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3890exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3891@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3892a @samp{/} character.
3893
3894File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3895specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3896does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3897
3898If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3899appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3900will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3901sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3902@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3903@smallexample
3904.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3905.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3906@end smallexample
3907
bcaa7b3e 3908@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
3909Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3910in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
3911this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3912pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3913@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
3914into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3915
bcaa7b3e
L
3916@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3917@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3918difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3919ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3920
02ecc8e9
L
3921@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
3922@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3923difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
3924ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
3925encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
3926
bcaa7b3e
L
3927@cindex SORT
3928@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3929
3930When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3931can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3932
3933@enumerate
3934@item
3935@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3936It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3937sections have the same name.
3938@item
3939@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3940It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3941sections have the same alignment.
3942@item
c0065db7 3943@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
3944treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3945@item
3946@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3947is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3948@item
3949All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3950@end enumerate
3951
3952When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3953section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3954takes precedence over the command line option.
3955
3956If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3957command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3958treated as nested sorting command.
3959
3960@enumerate
3961@item
3962@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3963@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3964@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3965@item
3966@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3967@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3968@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3969@end enumerate
3970
3971If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3972command line option will be ignored.
3973
252b5132
RH
3974If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
3975@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
3976precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3977
3978This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3979files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
3980sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
3981The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
3982with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
3983linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
3984@smallexample
3985@group
3986SECTIONS @{
3987 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3988 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
3989 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3990 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3991@}
3992@end group
3993@end smallexample
3994
3995@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 3996@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
3997@cindex common symbol placement
3998@cindex uninitialized data placement
3999A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4000file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4001linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4002named @samp{COMMON}.
4003
4004You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4005other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4006particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4007input files are placed in another section.
4008
4009In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4010@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4011@smallexample
4012.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4013@end smallexample
4014
4015@cindex scommon section
4016@cindex small common symbols
4017Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4018example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4019symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4020different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4021the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4022symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4023to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4024locations.
4025
4026@cindex [COMMON]
4027You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4028notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4029@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4030
4031@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4032@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4033@cindex KEEP
4034@cindex garbage collection
4035When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4036it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4037This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4038with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4039@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4040
4041@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4042@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4043The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4044to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4045start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4046@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4047follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4048@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4049@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4050All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4051files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4052
4053@smallexample
4054@group
4055SECTIONS @{
4056 outputa 0x10000 :
4057 @{
4058 all.o
4059 foo.o (.input1)
4060 @}
36f63dca
NC
4061@end group
4062@group
252b5132
RH
4063 outputb :
4064 @{
4065 foo.o (.input2)
4066 foo1.o (.input1)
4067 @}
36f63dca
NC
4068@end group
4069@group
252b5132
RH
4070 outputc :
4071 @{
4072 *(.input1)
4073 *(.input2)
4074 @}
4075@}
4076@end group
a1ab1d2a 4077@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4078
4079@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4080@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4081@cindex data
4082@cindex section data
4083@cindex output section data
4084@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4085@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4086@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4087@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4088@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4089You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4090@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4091an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4092parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4093value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4094counter.
4095
4096The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4097store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4098bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4099stored.
4100
4101For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4102of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4103@smallexample
4104BYTE(1)
4105LONG(addr)
4106@end smallexample
4107
4108When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4109same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4110target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4111@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4112@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4113
4114If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4115which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4116When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4117true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4118endianness of the first input object file.
4119
36f63dca 4120Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4121between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4122@smallexample
4123SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4124@end smallexample
4125whereas this will work:
4126@smallexample
4127SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4128@end smallexample
4129
252b5132
RH
4130@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4131@cindex holes, filling
4132@cindex unspecified memory
4133You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4134current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4135otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4136gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4137with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4138necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4139point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4140than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4141different parts of an output section.
4142
4143This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4144value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4145@smallexample
563e308f 4146FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4147@end smallexample
4148
4149The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4150section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4151part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4152entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4153precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4154expression.
252b5132
RH
4155
4156@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4157@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4158There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4159commands.
4160
4161@table @code
4162@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4163@cindex input filename symbols
4164@cindex filename symbols
4165@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4166The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4167The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4168file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4169the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4170
4171This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4172normally used for any other object file format.
4173
4174@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4175@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4176@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4177@item CONSTRUCTORS
4178When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4179unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4180destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4181arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4182automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4183For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4184linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4185@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4186ignored for other object file formats.
4187
4188The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4189constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4190Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4191the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4192first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4193of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4194compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4195formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4196@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4197the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4198destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4199@code{exit}.
4200
4201For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4202arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4203addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4204and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4205linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4206runtime code expects to see.
4207
4208@smallexample
4209 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4210 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4211 *(.ctors)
4212 LONG(0)
4213 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4214 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4215 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4216 *(.dtors)
4217 LONG(0)
4218 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4219@end smallexample
4220
4221If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4222which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4223are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4224are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4225command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4226@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4227@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4228@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4229
4230Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4231and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4232need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4233scripts.
4234
4235@end table
4236
4237@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4238@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4239@cindex discarding sections
4240@cindex sections, discarding
4241@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4242The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4243for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4244be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4245@smallexample
49c13adb 4246.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4247@end smallexample
4248@noindent
4249will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4250@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4251sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4252space in an output section will also create the output section.
4253
a0976ea4 4254The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4255on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4256symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4257the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4258section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4259
4260@cindex /DISCARD/
4261The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4262input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4263section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4264
4265@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4266@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4267@cindex output section attributes
4268We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4269like this:
0c71d759 4270
252b5132 4271@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4272@group
7e7d5768 4273@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4274 [AT(@var{lma})]
4275 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4276 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4277 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4278 @{
4279 @var{output-section-command}
4280 @var{output-section-command}
4281 @dots{}
562d3460 4282 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4283@end group
4284@end smallexample
0c71d759 4285
252b5132
RH
4286We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4287@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4288remaining section attributes.
4289
a1ab1d2a 4290@menu
252b5132
RH
4291* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4292* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4293* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4294* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4295* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4296* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4297* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4298* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4299@end menu
4300
4301@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4302@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4303Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4304parentheses. The following types are defined:
4305
4306@table @code
4307@item NOLOAD
4308The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4309loaded into memory when the program is run.
4310@item DSECT
4311@itemx COPY
4312@itemx INFO
4313@itemx OVERLAY
4314These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4315rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4316marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4317section when the program is run.
4318@end table
4319
4320@kindex NOLOAD
4321@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4322@cindex loading, preventing
4323The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4324the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4325the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4326@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4327need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4328@smallexample
4329@group
4330SECTIONS @{
4331 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4332 @dots{}
4333@}
4334@end group
4335@end smallexample
4336
4337@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4338@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4339@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4340@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4341@cindex load address
4342@cindex section load address
4343Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4344@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4345@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4346specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4347address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4348
ea5cae92
NC
4349The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4350specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4351takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4352load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4353region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4354
4355If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4356section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4357load address:
4358
4359@itemize @bullet
4360@item
4361If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4362the LMA address as well.
4363
4364@item
4365If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4366
4367@item
4368Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4369with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4370section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4371VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4372the last section in the located region.
4373
4374@item
4375If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4376that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4377
4378@item
4379If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4380section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4381@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4382
4383@cindex ROM initialized data
4384@cindex initialized data in ROM
4385This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4386example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4387called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4388@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4389even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4390uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4391defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4392counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4393
4394@smallexample
4395@group
4396SECTIONS
4397 @{
4398 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4399 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4400 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4401 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4402 .bss 0x3000 :
4403 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4404@}
4405@end group
4406@end smallexample
4407
4408The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4409this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4410the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4411how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4412script.
4413
4414@smallexample
4415@group
4416extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4417char *src = &_etext;
4418char *dst = &_data;
4419
ea5cae92
NC
4420/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4421while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4422 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4423
ea5cae92 4424/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4425for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4426 *dst = 0;
4427@end group
4428@end smallexample
4429
bbf115d3
L
4430@node Forced Output Alignment
4431@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4432@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4433@cindex forcing output section alignment
4434@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4435You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4436
7e7d5768
AM
4437@node Forced Input Alignment
4438@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4439@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4440@cindex forcing input section alignment
4441@cindex input section alignment
4442You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4443SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4444sections, whether larger or smaller.
4445
0c71d759
NC
4446@node Output Section Constraint
4447@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4448@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4449@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4450@cindex constraints on output sections
4451You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4452of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4453read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4454@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4455
252b5132 4456@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4457@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4458@kindex >@var{region}
4459@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4460@cindex memory regions and sections
4461You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4462using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4463
4464Here is a simple example:
4465@smallexample
4466@group
4467MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4468SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4469@end group
4470@end smallexample
4471
4472@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4473@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4474@kindex :@var{phdr}
4475@cindex section, assigning to program header
4476@cindex program headers and sections
4477You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4478using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4479one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4480assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4481@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4482linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4483
4484Here is a simple example:
4485@smallexample
4486@group
4487PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4488SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4489@end group
4490@end smallexample
4491
4492@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4493@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4494@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4495@cindex section fill pattern
4496@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4497You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4498@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4499(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4500within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4501alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4502necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4503of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4504an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4505fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4506other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4507pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4508expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4509
4510You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4511output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4512
4513Here is a simple example:
4514@smallexample
4515@group
563e308f 4516SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4517@end group
4518@end smallexample
4519
4520@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4521@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4522@kindex OVERLAY
4523@cindex overlays
4524An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4525are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4526the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4527copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4528required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4529can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4530than another.
4531
4532Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4533@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4534output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4535command is as follows:
4536@smallexample
4537@group
4538OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4539 @{
4540 @var{secname1}
4541 @{
4542 @var{output-section-command}
4543 @var{output-section-command}
4544 @dots{}
4545 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4546 @var{secname2}
4547 @{
4548 @var{output-section-command}
4549 @var{output-section-command}
4550 @dots{}
4551 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4552 @dots{}
4553 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4554@end group
4555@end smallexample
4556
4557Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4558section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4559section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4560those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4561except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4562sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4563
4564The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4565addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4566memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4567whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4568and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4569and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4570
4571If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4572among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4573all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4574section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4575NOCROSSREFS}.
4576
4577For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4578provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4579defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4580@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4581the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4582within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4583symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4584
4585At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4586the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4587
4588Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4589@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4590@smallexample
4591@group
4592 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4593 @{
4594 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4595 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4596 @}
4597@end group
4598@end smallexample
4599@noindent
4600This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4601address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4602@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4603following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4604@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4605@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4606
4607C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4608like the following.
4609
4610@smallexample
4611@group
4612 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4613 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4614 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4615@end group
4616@end smallexample
4617
4618Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4619everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4620example could have been written identically as follows.
4621
4622@smallexample
4623@group
4624 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4625 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4626 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4627 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4628 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4629 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4630 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4631@end group
4632@end smallexample
4633
4634@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4635@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4636@kindex MEMORY
4637@cindex memory regions
4638@cindex regions of memory
4639@cindex allocating memory
4640@cindex discontinuous memory
4641The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4642memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4643
4644The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4645memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4646may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4647can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4648set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4649regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4650around to fit into the available regions.
4651
4652A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4653command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4654you wish. The syntax is:
4655@smallexample
4656@group
a1ab1d2a 4657MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4658 @{
4659 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4660 @dots{}
4661 @}
4662@end group
4663@end smallexample
4664
4665The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4666region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4667Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4668with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4669must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4670add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4671command.
252b5132
RH
4672
4673@cindex memory region attributes
4674The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4675whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4676not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4677@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4678section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4679the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4680them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4681
4682The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4683@table @samp
4684@item R
4685Read-only section
4686@item W
4687Read/write section
4688@item X
4689Executable section
4690@item A
4691Allocatable section
4692@item I
4693Initialized section
4694@item L
4695Same as @samp{I}
4696@item !
c09e9a8c 4697Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4698@end table
4699
4700If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4701@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4702attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4703in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4704attributes.
4705
4706@kindex ORIGIN =
4707@kindex o =
4708@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4709The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4710the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4711cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4712abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4713@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4714
4715@kindex LENGTH =
4716@kindex len =
4717@kindex l =
4718The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4719region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4720be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4721@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4722
4723In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4724available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4725and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4726linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4727is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4728or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4729explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4730region.
4731
4732@smallexample
4733@group
a1ab1d2a 4734MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4735 @{
4736 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4737 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4738 @}
4739@end group
4740@end smallexample
4741
4742Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4743specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4744@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4745a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4746output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4747was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4748the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4749output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4750region, the linker will issue an error message.
4751
3ec57632 4752It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4753expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4754@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4755
4756@smallexample
4757@group
c0065db7 4758 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4759@end group
4760@end smallexample
4761
252b5132
RH
4762@node PHDRS
4763@section PHDRS Command
4764@kindex PHDRS
4765@cindex program headers
4766@cindex ELF program headers
4767@cindex program segments
4768@cindex segments, ELF
4769The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4770@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4771loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4772program with the @samp{-p} option.
4773
4774When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4775reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4776program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4777This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4778interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4779
4780The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4781in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4782precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4783the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4784not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4785
4786The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4787generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4788ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4789
4790This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4791@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4792
4793@smallexample
4794@group
4795PHDRS
4796@{
4797 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4798 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4799@}
4800@end group
4801@end smallexample
4802
4803The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4804of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4805header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4806with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
4807must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4808is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
4809
4810Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4811system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4812specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4813sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4814attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4815Section Phdr}.
4816
4817It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4818merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4819repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4820contain the section.
4821
4822If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4823then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4824not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4825convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4826placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4827default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4828segment at all.
4829
4830@kindex FILEHDR
4831@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 4832You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
4833the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4834The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4835file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 4836include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
4837segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
4838these keywords.
252b5132
RH
4839
4840The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4841value of the keyword.
4842
4843@table @asis
4844@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4845Indicates an unused program header.
4846
4847@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4848Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4849the file.
4850
4851@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4852Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4853
4854@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4855Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4856found.
4857
4858@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4859Indicates a segment holding note information.
4860
4861@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4862A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4863ABI.
4864
4865@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4866Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4867
4868@item @var{expression}
4869An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4870be used for types not defined above.
4871@end table
4872
4873You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4874in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4875@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4876Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4877output section attribute.
4878
4879The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4880which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4881explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4882an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4883header.
4884
4885Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4886headers used on a native ELF system.
4887
4888@example
4889@group
4890PHDRS
4891@{
4892 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4893 interp PT_INTERP ;
4894 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4895 data PT_LOAD ;
4896 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4897@}
4898
4899SECTIONS
4900@{
4901 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4902 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4903 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4904 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4905 @dots{}
4906 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4907 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4908 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4909 @dots{}
4910@}
4911@end group
4912@end example
4913
4914@node VERSION
4915@section VERSION Command
4916@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4917@cindex symbol versions
4918@cindex version script
4919@cindex versions of symbols
4920The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4921only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4922symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4923a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4924shared library.
4925
4926You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4927you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4928also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4929
4930The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4931@smallexample
4932VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4933@end smallexample
4934
4935The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4936Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4937version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4938version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4939version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4940scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4941library.
4942
4943The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4944examples.
4945
4946@smallexample
4947VERS_1.1 @{
4948 global:
4949 foo1;
4950 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
4951 old*;
4952 original*;
4953 new*;
252b5132
RH
4954@};
4955
4956VERS_1.2 @{
4957 foo2;
4958@} VERS_1.1;
4959
4960VERS_2.0 @{
4961 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 4962 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 4963 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
4964 "f(int, double)";
4965 @};
252b5132
RH
4966@} VERS_1.2;
4967@end smallexample
4968
4969This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
4970version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
4971The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
4972a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
4973of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4974symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
4975is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
4976in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
4977However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
4978name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
4979
4980Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
4981depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
4982to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
4983
4984Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
4985depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
4986and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
4987
4988When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4989specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4990unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 4991unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
4992somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
4993wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
4994wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
4995set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
4996ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
4997
4998The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
4999they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5000could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5001However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5002
0f6bf451 5003Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5004in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5005symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5006won't.
5007
5008@smallexample
7c9c73be 5009@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5010@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5011
252b5132
RH
5012When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5013symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5014requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5015shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5016loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5017linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5018application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5019way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5020all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5021search for each symbol reference.
5022
5023The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5024doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5025that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5026functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5027the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5028required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5029that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5030versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5031the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5032
5033There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5034first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5035source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5036script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5037maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5038@smallexample
5039__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5040@end smallexample
5041@noindent
5042in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5043be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5044The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5045@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5046takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5047
5048The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5049function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5050an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5051version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5052linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5053
5054To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5055source file. Here is an example:
5056
5057@smallexample
5058__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5059__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5060__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5061__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5062@end smallexample
5063
5064In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5065unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5066example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5067@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5068
5069When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5070some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5071this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5072@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5073declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5074you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5075
5076If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5077within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5078(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5079specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5080
cb840a31
L
5081You can also specify the language in the version script:
5082
5083@smallexample
5084VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5085@end smallexample
5086
c0065db7 5087The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5088The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5089demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5090patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5091@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5092
86043bbb
MM
5093Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5094described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5095or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5096the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5097whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5098cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5099might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5100should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5101expect when you upgrade.
5102
252b5132
RH
5103@node Expressions
5104@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5105@cindex expressions
5106@cindex arithmetic
5107The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5108that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5109expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5110host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5111
5112You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5113
5114The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5115expressions.
5116
5117@menu
5118* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5119* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5120* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5121* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5122* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5123* Operators:: Operators
5124* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5125* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5126* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5127@end menu
5128
5129@node Constants
5130@subsection Constants
5131@cindex integer notation
5132@cindex constants in linker scripts
5133All constants are integers.
5134
5135As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5136octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8
NC
5137hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5138@samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5139@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5140value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5141
5142@cindex scaled integers
5143@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5144@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5145@cindex suffixes for integers
5146@cindex integer suffixes
5147In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5148constant by
5149@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5150@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5151@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5152@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5153@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5154@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5155@tex
5156${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5157@end tex
5158@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5159respectively. For example, the following
5160all refer to the same quantity:
5161
252b5132 5162@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5163_fourk_1 = 4K;
5164_fourk_2 = 4096;
5165_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5166_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5167@end smallexample
5168
8a308ae8
NC
5169Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5170conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5171
0c71d759
NC
5172@node Symbolic Constants
5173@subsection Symbolic Constants
5174@cindex symbolic constants
5175@kindex CONSTANT
5176It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5177the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5178
5179@table @code
5180@item MAXPAGESIZE
5181@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5182The target's maximum page size.
5183
5184@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5185@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5186The target's default page size.
5187@end table
5188
5189So for example:
5190
5191@smallexample
5192 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5193@end smallexample
5194
5195will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5196supported by the target.
5197
252b5132
RH
5198@node Symbols
5199@subsection Symbol Names
5200@cindex symbol names
5201@cindex names
5202@cindex quoted symbol names
5203@kindex "
5204Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5205and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5206Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5207specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5208keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5209@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5210"SECTION" = 9;
5211"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5212@end smallexample
5213
5214Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5215to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5216whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5217
ecca9871
L
5218@node Orphan Sections
5219@subsection Orphan Sections
5220@cindex orphan
5221Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5222are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5223script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5224output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5225placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5226attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5227same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5228If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5229at the end of the file.
5230
5231For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5232well as section flag.
5233
41911f68 5234If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5235the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
41911f68
NC
5236__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5237section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5238orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5239representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5240character.
5241
252b5132
RH
5242@node Location Counter
5243@subsection The Location Counter
5244@kindex .
5245@cindex dot
5246@cindex location counter
5247@cindex current output location
5248The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5249current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5250location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5251within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5252anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5253
5254@cindex holes
5255Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5256moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5257location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5258and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5259doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5260
5261@smallexample
5262SECTIONS
5263@{
5264 output :
5265 @{
5266 file1(.text)
5267 . = . + 1000;
5268 file2(.text)
5269 . += 1000;
5270 file3(.text)
563e308f 5271 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5272@}
5273@end smallexample
5274@noindent
5275In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5276located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5277followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5278@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5279@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5280specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5281
5c6bbab8
NC
5282@cindex dot inside sections
5283Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5284current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5285statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5286absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5287however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5288not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5289
5290@smallexample
5291SECTIONS
5292@{
5293 . = 0x100
5294 .text: @{
5295 *(.text)
5296 . = 0x200
5297 @}
5298 . = 0x500
5299 .data: @{
5300 *(.data)
5301 . += 0x600
5302 @}
5303@}
5304@end smallexample
5305
5306The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5307and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5308the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5309much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5310move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5311and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5312the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5313the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5314
b5666f2f
AM
5315@cindex dot outside sections
5316Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5317output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5318needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5319
5320@smallexample
5321SECTIONS
5322@{
5323 start_of_text = . ;
5324 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5325 end_of_text = . ;
5326
5327 start_of_data = . ;
5328 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5329 end_of_data = . ;
5330@}
5331@end smallexample
5332
5333If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5334not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5335between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5336should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5337blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5338the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5339sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5340statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5341special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5342place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5343as follows:
5344
5345@smallexample
5346SECTIONS
5347@{
5348 start_of_text = . ;
5349 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5350 end_of_text = . ;
5351
5352 start_of_data = . ;
5353 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5354 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5355 end_of_data = . ;
5356@}
5357@end smallexample
5358
5359This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5360@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5361placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5362assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5363a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5364section. So you could write:
5365
5366@smallexample
5367SECTIONS
5368@{
5369 start_of_text = . ;
5370 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5371 end_of_text = . ;
5372
5373 . = . ;
5374 start_of_data = . ;
5375 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5376 end_of_data = . ;
5377@}
5378@end smallexample
5379
5380Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5381@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5382
252b5132
RH
5383@need 2000
5384@node Operators
5385@subsection Operators
5386@cindex operators for arithmetic
5387@cindex arithmetic operators
5388@cindex precedence in expressions
5389The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5390the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5391@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5392@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5393@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5394@smallexample
5395precedence associativity Operators Notes
5396(highest)
53971 left ! - ~ (1)
53982 left * / %
53993 left + -
54004 left >> <<
54015 left == != > < <= >=
54026 left &
54037 left |
54048 left &&
54059 left ||
540610 right ? :
540711 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5408(lowest)
5409@end smallexample
5410Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5411(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5412(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5413@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5414@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5415@tex
5416\vskip \baselineskip
5417%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5418\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5419\hrule
5420\halign
5421{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5422height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5423&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5424height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5425\noalign{\hrule}
5426height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5427&highest&&&&&\cr
5428% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5429&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5430&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5431&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5432&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5433&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5434&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5435&7&&left&&|&\cr
5436&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5437&9&&left&&||&\cr
5438&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5439&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5440&lowest&&&&&\cr
5441height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5442\hrule}
5443@end tex
5444@iftex
5445{
5446@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5447@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5448@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5449}
5450@end iftex
5451@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5452
5453@node Evaluation
5454@subsection Evaluation
5455@cindex lazy evaluation
5456@cindex expression evaluation order
5457The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5458an expression when absolutely necessary.
5459
5460The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5461address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5462regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5463as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5464
5465However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5466until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5467other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5468for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5469
5470The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5471assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5472allocation.
5473
5474Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5475@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5476
5477If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5478available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5479following
5480@smallexample
5481@group
5482SECTIONS
5483 @{
a1ab1d2a 5484 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5485 @{ *(.text) @}
5486 @}
5487@end group
5488@end smallexample
5489@noindent
5490will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5491address}.
5492
5493@node Expression Section
5494@subsection The Section of an Expression
5495@cindex expression sections
5496@cindex absolute expressions
5497@cindex relative expressions
5498@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5499@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5500@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5501Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5502relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5503using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5504value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5505symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5506operations.
5507
abf4be64
AM
5508Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5509section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5510address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5511@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5512functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5513One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5514(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5515differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5516versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5517section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5518Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5519absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5520given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5521everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5522
5523In the following simple example,
252b5132 5524
7542af2a
AM
5525@smallexample
5526@group
5527SECTIONS
5528 @{
5529 . = 0x100;
5530 __executable_start = 0x100;
5531 .data :
5532 @{
5533 . = 0x10;
5534 __data_start = 0x10;
5535 *(.data)
5536 @}
5537 @dots{}
5538 @}
5539@end group
5540@end smallexample
252b5132 5541
7542af2a
AM
5542both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5543address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5544@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5545section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5546
5c3049d2
AM
5547For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5548addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5549
5550@itemize @bullet
5551@item
5552Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5553relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5554and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5555@item
5556Unary operations on an absolute address, and binary operations on one
5557or more absolute addresses or on two relative addresses not in the
5558same section, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute
5559address before applying the operator.
5560@end itemize
5561
5562The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5563
5564@itemize @bullet
5565@item
5566An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5567@item
5568The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5569@item
5570The result of other operations on relative addresses (after above
5571conversions) is a relative address in the same section as the operand(s).
5572@item
5573The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5574conversions) is an absolute address.
5575@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5576
5577You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5578to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5579create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5580section @samp{.data}:
5581@smallexample
5582SECTIONS
5583 @{
5584 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5585 @}
5586@end smallexample
5587@noindent
5588If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5589@samp{.data} section.
5590
7542af2a
AM
5591Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5592particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5593
252b5132
RH
5594@node Builtin Functions
5595@subsection Builtin Functions
5596@cindex functions in expressions
5597The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5598use in linker script expressions.
5599
5600@table @code
5601@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5602@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5603@cindex expression, absolute
5604Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5605of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5606value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5607normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5608
5609@item ADDR(@var{section})
5610@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5611@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5612Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5613script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5614the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5615@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5616@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5617the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5618@smallexample
5619@group
5620SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5621 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5622 @{
252b5132
RH
5623 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5624 @dots{}
5625 @}
5626 .output :
5627 @{
5628 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5629 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5630 @}
5631@dots{} @}
5632@end group
5633@end smallexample
5634
876f4090
NS
5635@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5636@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5637@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5638@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5639@cindex round up location counter
5640@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5641@cindex round up expression
5642@cindex align expression
5643Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5644to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5645doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5646arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5647expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5648equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5649
5650Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5651next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5652variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5653input sections:
252b5132
RH
5654@smallexample
5655@group
5656SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5657 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5658 *(.data)
5659 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5660 @}
5661@dots{} @}
5662@end group
5663@end smallexample
5664@noindent
5665The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5666a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5667a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5668of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5669
5670The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5671
362c1d1a
NS
5672@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5673@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5674@cindex section alignment
5675Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5676been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5677evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5678the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5679value in that section.
5680@smallexample
5681@group
5682SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5683 .output @{
5684 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5685 @dots{}
5686 @}
5687@dots{} @}
5688@end group
5689@end smallexample
5690
252b5132
RH
5691@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5692@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5693This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5694scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5695section.
5696
2d20f7bf
JJ
5697@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5698@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5699This is equivalent to either
5700@smallexample
5701(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5702@end smallexample
5703or
5704@smallexample
5705(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5706@end smallexample
5707@noindent
5708depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5709for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5710@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5711If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5712memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5713bytes in the on-disk file.
5714
5715This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5716any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5717@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5718be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5719working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5720
5721@noindent
5722Example:
5723@smallexample
5724 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5725@end smallexample
5726
5727@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5728@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5729This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5730evaluation purposes.
5731
5732@smallexample
5733 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5734@end smallexample
5735
a4f5ad88
JJ
5736@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5737@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5738This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5739@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5740When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5741does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5742@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5743boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5744it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5745@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5746
5747@smallexample
5748 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5749@end smallexample
5750
252b5132
RH
5751@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5752@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5753@cindex symbol defaults
5754Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5755defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5756return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5757default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5758shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5759the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5760existed, its value is preserved:
5761
5762@smallexample
5763@group
5764SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5765 .text : @{
5766 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5767 @dots{}
5768 @}
5769 @dots{}
5770@}
5771@end group
5772@end smallexample
5773
3ec57632
NC
5774@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5775@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5776Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5777
252b5132
RH
5778@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5779@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5780@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 5781Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
5782Section LMA}).
5783
5784@kindex MAX
5785@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5786Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5787
5788@kindex MIN
5789@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5790Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5791
5792@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5793@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5794@cindex unallocated address, next
5795Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5796This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5797use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5798output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5799
3ec57632
NC
5800@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5801@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5802Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5803
ba916c8a
MM
5804@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5805@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5806Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5807value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5808option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5809@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5810be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 5811``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
5812name.
5813
252b5132
RH
5814@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5815@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5816@cindex section size
5817Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5818been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5819evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5820@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5821@smallexample
5822@group
5823SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5824 .output @{
5825 .start = . ;
5826 @dots{}
5827 .end = . ;
5828 @}
5829 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5830 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5831@dots{} @}
5832@end group
5833@end smallexample
5834
5835@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5836@itemx sizeof_headers
5837@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5838@cindex header size
5839Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5840information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5841this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5842choose, to facilitate paging.
5843
5844@cindex not enough room for program headers
5845@cindex program headers, not enough room
5846When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5847@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5848number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5849addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5850additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5851room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5852the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5853script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5854you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5855command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5856@end table
5857
5858@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5859@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5860@cindex implicit linker scripts
5861If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5862an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5863linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5864linker will report an error.
5865
5866An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5867
5868Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5869assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5870commands.
5871
5872Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5873at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5874read. This can affect archive searching.
5875
5876@ifset GENERIC
5877@node Machine Dependent
5878@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5879
5880@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5881@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5882sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5883functionality are not listed.
5884
5885@menu
36f63dca
NC
5886@ifset H8300
5887* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5888@end ifset
5889@ifset I960
5890* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5891@end ifset
5892@ifset ARM
5893* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5894@end ifset
5895@ifset HPPA
5896* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5897@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
5898@ifset M68K
5899* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5900@end ifset
3c3bdf30 5901@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 5902* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 5903@end ifset
2469cfa2 5904@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 5905* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 5906@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
5907@ifset M68HC11
5908* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5909@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
5910@ifset POWERPC
5911* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5912@end ifset
5913@ifset POWERPC64
5914* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5915@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
5916@ifset SPU
5917* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5918@end ifset
74459f0e 5919@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 5920* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 5921@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
5922@ifset WIN32
5923* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5924@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
5925@ifset XTENSA
5926* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5927@end ifset
252b5132
RH
5928@end menu
5929@end ifset
5930
252b5132
RH
5931@ifset H8300
5932@ifclear GENERIC
5933@raisesections
5934@end ifclear
5935
5936@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 5937@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
5938
5939@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 5940For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
5941you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5942
5943@table @emph
5944@cindex relaxing on H8/300
5945@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 5946@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
5947targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5948program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5949respectively.
5950
5951@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5952@item synthesizing instructions
5953@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 5954@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
5955sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5956page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5957(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5958@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5959top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
5960
5961@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 5962@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 5963biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 5964which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
5965page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
5966(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 5967@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
5968the top page of memory).
5969
5970@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
5971@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
597232 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
5973changes them to use 16 bit address form.
5974(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 5975@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 5976the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
5977@end table
5978
5979@ifclear GENERIC
5980@lowersections
5981@end ifclear
5982@end ifset
5983
36f63dca 5984@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 5985@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 5986@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
5987@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
5988@node Renesas
5989@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 5990
c2dcd04e
NC
5991@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
5992H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
5993options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
5994@end ifset
5995@end ifclear
5996
5997@ifset I960
5998@ifclear GENERIC
5999@raisesections
6000@end ifclear
6001
6002@node i960
6003@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6004
6005@cindex i960 support
6006
6007You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6008specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6009family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6010incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6011linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6012libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6013search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6014
6015For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6016well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6017paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6018the names
6019
6020@smallexample
6021@group
6022try
6023libtry.a
6024tryca
6025libtryca.a
6026@end group
6027@end smallexample
6028
6029@noindent
6030The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6031two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6032
6033You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6034the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6035use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6036specifies a library.
6037
6038@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6039@cindex relaxing on i960
6040@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6041you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6042@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6043them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6044instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6045instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6046target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6047not itself call any subroutines).
6048
48229727
JB
6049@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6050@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6051@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6052The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6053
6054The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6055
85fdf906
AH
6056@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6057@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6058The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6059
36f63dca
NC
6060@ifclear GENERIC
6061@lowersections
6062@end ifclear
6063@end ifset
6064
6065@ifset ARM
6066@ifclear GENERIC
6067@raisesections
6068@end ifclear
6069
93fd0973
SC
6070@ifset M68HC11
6071@ifclear GENERIC
6072@raisesections
6073@end ifclear
6074
6075@node M68HC11/68HC12
6076@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6077
6078@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6079
6080@subsection Linker Relaxation
6081
6082For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6083optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6084
6085@table @emph
6086@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6087@item relaxing address modes
6088@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6089targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6090program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6091respectively.
6092
6093@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6094transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6095page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6096
6097@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6098When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6099of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6100addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6101@code{bset} instructions.
6102
6103@end table
6104
6105@subsection Trampoline Generation
6106
6107@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6108@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6109For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6110call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6111will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6112trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6113case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6114point to the function trampoline.
6115
6116@ifclear GENERIC
6117@lowersections
6118@end ifclear
6119@end ifset
6120
36f63dca 6121@node ARM
3674e28a 6122@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6123
6124@cindex ARM interworking support
6125@kindex --support-old-code
6126For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6127between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6128been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6129line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6130libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6131option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6132given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6133which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6134the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6135non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6136
6137@cindex thumb entry point
6138@cindex entry point, thumb
6139@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6140The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6141@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6142But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6143branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6144executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6145
ce11ba6c
KT
6146@cindex PE import table prefixing
6147@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6148The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6149the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6150elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6151import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6152
e489d0ae
PB
6153@cindex BE8
6154@kindex --be8
6155The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6156executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6157The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6158
3674e28a
PB
6159@cindex TARGET1
6160@kindex --target1-rel
6161@kindex --target1-abs
6162The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6163@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6164or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6165and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6166
6167@cindex TARGET2
6168@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6169The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6170@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6171meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6172@table @samp
6173@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6174@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6175@item abs
6176@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6177@item got-rel
6178@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6179@end table
6180
319850b4
JB
6181@cindex FIX_V4BX
6182@kindex --fix-v4bx
6183The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6184specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6185interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6186also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6187
6188In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6189linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6190@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6191
6192In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6193relocations are ignored.
6194
845b51d6
PB
6195@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6196@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6197Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6198relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6199
6200@smallexample
6201TST rM, #1
6202MOVEQ PC, rM
6203BX Rn
6204@end smallexample
6205
6206This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6207and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6208condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
6209
33bfe774
JB
6210@cindex USE_BLX
6211@kindex --use-blx
6212The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6213BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6214situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6215code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6216each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6217
6218This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6219specify it if you are using that target.
6220
c6dd86c6
JB
6221@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6222@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6223The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6224bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6225instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6226to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6227the support code can read the intended values.
6228
6229The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6230intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6231and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6232intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6233full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6234you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6235
6236If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6237enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6238@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6239mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6240vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6241@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6242
6243If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6244potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6245such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6246first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6247instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6248the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6249are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6250
bf21ed78
MS
6251@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6252@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6253The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6254warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6255enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6256linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6257using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6258not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6259
6260@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6261@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6262The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6263warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6264@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6265linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6266using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6267
726150b7
NC
6268@cindex PIC_VENEER
6269@kindex --pic-veneer
6270The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6271ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6272is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6273@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6274
6275@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6276@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6277The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6278code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6279perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6280placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6281controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6282The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6283duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
6284group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6285code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6286where they should be placed.
6287
6288The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6289@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6290placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6291branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6292placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6293value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6294exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6295A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6296linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6297from the input sections.
6298
6299The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6300@samp{N = +1}.
6301
1a51c1a4
NC
6302Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6303only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6304otherwise.
6305
36f63dca
NC
6306@ifclear GENERIC
6307@lowersections
6308@end ifclear
6309@end ifset
6310
6311@ifset HPPA
6312@ifclear GENERIC
6313@raisesections
6314@end ifclear
6315
6316@node HPPA ELF32
6317@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6318@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6319@kindex --multi-subspace
6320When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6321import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6322The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6323stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6324multiple sub-spaces.
6325
6326@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6327@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6328Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6329stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6330@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6331sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6332a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6333the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6334conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6335prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6336A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6337branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6338@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6339@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6340detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6341positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6342
6343Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6344single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6345create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6346large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6347
6348@ifclear GENERIC
6349@lowersections
6350@end ifclear
6351@end ifset
6352
7fb9f789
NC
6353@ifset M68K
6354@ifclear GENERIC
6355@raisesections
6356@end ifclear
6357
6358@node M68K
6359@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6360
6361@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6362@kindex --got=@var{type}
6363The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6364The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6365@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6366the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6367@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6368entries only at non-negative offsets.
6369@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6370entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6371support such GOTs.
6372@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6373output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6374file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6375files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6376
6377@ifclear GENERIC
6378@lowersections
6379@end ifclear
6380@end ifset
6381
36f63dca
NC
6382@ifset MMIX
6383@ifclear GENERIC
6384@raisesections
6385@end ifclear
6386
6387@node MMIX
6388@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6389For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6390@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6391understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6392can translate between the two formats.
6393
6394There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6395Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6396registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6397equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6398@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6399global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6400this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6401symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6402
7a2de473
HPN
6403Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6404@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6405The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6406of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6407
6408Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6409are left out from an mmo file.
6410
6411@ifclear GENERIC
6412@lowersections
6413@end ifclear
6414@end ifset
6415
6416@ifset MSP430
6417@ifclear GENERIC
6418@raisesections
6419@end ifclear
6420
6421@node MSP430
6422@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6423For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6424will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6425just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6426
6427@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6428The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6429
6430@table @code
6431@item @samp{.vectors}
6432Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6433
6434@item @samp{.bootloader}
6435Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6436in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6437
6438@item @samp{.infomem}
6439Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6440this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6441
c0065db7 6442@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6443This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6444in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6445
6446@item @samp{.noinit}
6447Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6448
c0065db7 6449The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6450@end table
6451
6452@ifclear GENERIC
6453@lowersections
6454@end ifclear
6455@end ifset
6456
2a60a7a8
AM
6457@ifset POWERPC
6458@ifclear GENERIC
6459@raisesections
6460@end ifclear
6461
6462@node PowerPC ELF32
6463@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6464@cindex PowerPC long branches
6465@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6466Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6467displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6468@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6469@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6470the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6471section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6472section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6473@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6474both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6475considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6476
6477@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6478@table @option
6479@cindex PowerPC PLT
6480@kindex --bss-plt
6481@item --bss-plt
6482Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6483generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6484the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6485writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6486@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6487PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6488compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6489BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6490
016687f8
AM
6491@kindex --secure-plt
6492@item --secure-plt
6493@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6494@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6495when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6496layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6497style BSS PLT.
6498
2a60a7a8
AM
6499@cindex PowerPC GOT
6500@kindex --sdata-got
6501@item --sdata-got
6502The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6503sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6504@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6505section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6506@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6507@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6508@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6509@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6510PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6511pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6512GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6513really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6514
6515@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6516@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6517@item --emit-stub-syms
6518This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6519symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6520
6521@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6522@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6523@item --no-tls-optimize
6524PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6525sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6526disable the optimization.
6527@end table
6528
6529@ifclear GENERIC
6530@lowersections
6531@end ifclear
6532@end ifset
6533
6534@ifset POWERPC64
6535@ifclear GENERIC
6536@raisesections
6537@end ifclear
6538
6539@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6540@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6541
6542@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6543@table @option
6544@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6545@kindex --stub-group-size
6546@item --stub-group-size
6547Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6548by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6549@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6550sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6551a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6552the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6553conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6554prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6555A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6556branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6557@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6558@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6559detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6560positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6561
6562Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6563single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6564create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6565large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6566
6567@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6568@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6569@item --emit-stub-syms
6570This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6571symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6572
6573@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6574@kindex --dotsyms
6575@kindex --no-dotsyms
6576@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6577These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6578in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6579function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6580code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6581properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6582to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6583@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6584dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6585feature.
6586
6587@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6588@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6589@item --no-tls-optimize
6590PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6591sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6592disable the optimization.
6593
6594@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6595@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6596@item --no-opd-optimize
6597PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6598corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6599the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6600Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6601
6602@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6603@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6604@item --non-overlapping-opd
6605Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6606@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6607the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6608entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6609
6610@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6611@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6612@item --no-toc-optimize
6613PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6614entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6615reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6616marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6617marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6618relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6619unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6620reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6621discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6622reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6623code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6624optimization.
6625
6626@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6627@kindex --no-multi-toc
6628@item --no-multi-toc
6629By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6630entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6631total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6632grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6633TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6634calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6635help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
663664K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6637Use this option to turn off this feature.
6638@end table
6639
6640@ifclear GENERIC
6641@lowersections
6642@end ifclear
6643@end ifset
6644
49fa1e15
AM
6645@ifset SPU
6646@ifclear GENERIC
6647@raisesections
6648@end ifclear
6649
6650@node SPU ELF
6651@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6652
6653@cindex SPU ELF options
6654@table @option
6655
6656@cindex SPU plugins
6657@kindex --plugin
6658@item --plugin
6659This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6660
6661@cindex SPU overlays
6662@kindex --no-overlays
6663@item --no-overlays
6664Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6665regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6666@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6667turns off all this special overlay handling.
6668
6669@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6670@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6671@item --emit-stub-syms
6672This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6673symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6674
6675@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6676@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6677@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6678This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6679function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6680on calls to non-overlay regions.
6681
6682@cindex SPU local store size
6683@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6684@item --local-store=lo:hi
6685@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6686the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6687range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6688
c0065db7 6689@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6690@kindex --stack-analysis
6691@item --stack-analysis
6692SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6693unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6694under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6695@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6696@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6697determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6698for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6699for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6700for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6701find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6702and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6703under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6704dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6705is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6706and calls will be given.
6707
c0065db7 6708@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6709@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6710@item --emit-stack-syms
6711This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6712in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6713These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6714functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6715functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6716such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6717The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6718@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6719@end table
6720
6721@ifclear GENERIC
6722@lowersections
6723@end ifclear
6724@end ifset
6725
36f63dca
NC
6726@ifset TICOFF
6727@ifclear GENERIC
6728@raisesections
6729@end ifclear
6730
6731@node TI COFF
6732@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6733@cindex TI COFF versions
6734@kindex --format=@var{version}
6735The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6736TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6737also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6738format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6739header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6740
6741@ifclear GENERIC
6742@lowersections
6743@end ifclear
6744@end ifset
6745
2ca22b03
NC
6746@ifset WIN32
6747@ifclear GENERIC
6748@raisesections
6749@end ifclear
6750
6751@node WIN32
6752@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6753
c0065db7 6754This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6755See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6756command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6757
6758@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6759@cindex import libraries
6760@item import libraries
69da35b5 6761The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6762libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6763regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6764archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6765support for creating such libraries provided with the
6766@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6767
c0065db7
RM
6768@item exporting DLL symbols
6769@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6770The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6771
6772@table @emph
6773@item using auto-export functionality
6774@cindex using auto-export functionality
6775By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6776which is controlled by the following command line options:
6777
0a5d968e
NC
6778@itemize
6779@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6780@item --exclude-symbols
6781@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6782@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 6783@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
6784@end itemize
6785
09e2aba4
DK
6786When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6787(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6788symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
6789often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6790private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
6791options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
6792exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6793final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6794
6795If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6796command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6797if either of the following are true:
6798
6799@itemize
6800@item A DEF file is used.
6801@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6802@end itemize
dc8465bf 6803
c0065db7
RM
6804@item using a DEF file
6805@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6806Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6807an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6808exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6809name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6810command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6811
6812@example
6813gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6814@end example
6815
0a5d968e
NC
6816Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6817@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6818
dc8465bf
NC
6819Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6820
6821@example
4b5bd4e7 6822LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6823
6824EXPORTS
6825foo
6826bar
6827_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6828another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6829var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
6830doo = foo == foo2
6831eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 6832@end example
dc8465bf 6833
7fcab871 6834This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
6835symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6836alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6837by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6838@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
6839@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
6840export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
6841in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
6842symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 6843
6b31ad16
DS
6844The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6845name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6846the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6847
b45619c0
NC
6848When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6849library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 6850@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 6851executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
6852
6853With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6854specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 6855non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
6856
6857If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
6858or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6859filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 6860
4b5bd4e7
DS
6861The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6862
6863@example
6864EXPORTS
6865 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6866 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 6867 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 6868@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
6869
6870Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6871@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6872@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6873@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6874Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
6875@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
6876string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
6877
6878The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6879
6880@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6881will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6882by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6883linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6884library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6885
6886@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6887The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6888the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6889@code{*_imp__foo}).
6890
6891@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6892well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6893read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6894variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6895the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6896extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6897application will behave unexpectedly.
6898
6899@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6900it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6901symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6902API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6903the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 6904
4b5bd4e7
DS
6905See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6906other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
6907
6908@cindex creating a DEF file
6909While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6910with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
6911
6912@item Using decorations
6913@cindex Using decorations
6914Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6915itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6916declared as:
6917
6918@example
6919__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6920__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6921@end example
6922
6923All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6924any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6925this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6926the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6927
6928Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 6929decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
6930instead:
6931
6932@example
6933__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6934__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6935@end example
6936
c0065db7
RM
6937This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6938when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
6939variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6940code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 6941of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
6942omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6943@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 6944information.
c0065db7 6945@end table
dc8465bf 6946
2ca22b03
NC
6947@cindex automatic data imports
6948@item automatic data imports
6949The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 6950by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 6951compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 6952issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 6953code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 6954c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 6955initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 6956decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 6957platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
6958command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6959The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6960suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6961trigger the feature's use.
6962
c0065db7 6963auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
6964additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
6965
c0065db7 6966"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
6967documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
6968
c0065db7
RM
6969The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
6970occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
6971One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
6972below.
6973
6974@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
6975For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
6976object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
6977offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
6978field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
6979in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 6980without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 6981The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
6982references.
6983
c0065db7
RM
6984The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
6985be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
6986themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
6987runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
6988compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
6989support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
6990run without error on an older system.
6991
c0065db7
RM
6992@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
6993enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
6994
6995@cindex direct linking to a dll
6996@item direct linking to a dll
6997The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
6998including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 6999libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7000traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7001libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7002function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7003though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7004storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7005tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7006large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7007
c0065db7 7008Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7009@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7010of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7011perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7012select the dll instead of an import library.
7013
2ca22b03 7014
69da35b5
NC
7015For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7016to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7017
7018@example
45e948fe
NC
7019libxxx.dll.a
7020xxx.dll.a
7021libxxx.a
7022xxx.lib
69da35b5 7023cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7024libxxx.dll
7025xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7026@end example
7027
69da35b5
NC
7028before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7029
c0065db7
RM
7030(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7031where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7032@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7033file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7034@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7035
c0065db7
RM
7036Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7037@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7038was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7039various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7040could coexist on the same machine.
7041
2ca22b03
NC
7042The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7043applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7044libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7045
7046@example
7047bin/
7048 cygxxx.dll
7049lib/
7050 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7051 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7052@end example
7053
c0065db7
RM
7054Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7055done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7056
70571. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7058@example
7059gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7060@end example
2ca22b03 7061
69da35b5
NC
7062However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7063(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7064@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7065not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7066
2ca22b03
NC
70672. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7068directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7069should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7070making the app/dll.
7071
7072@example
7073ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7074@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7075
7076Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7077
7078@example
7079gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7080@end example
69da35b5
NC
7081
7082This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7083perfectly legal
7084
7085@example
7086bin/
7087 cygxxx-5.dll
7088lib/
c0065db7 7089 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7090@end example
7091
dc8465bf 7092Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7093even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7094@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7095
7096Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7097wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7098
70991. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7100work with auto-imported data.
7101
dc8465bf
NC
71022. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7103import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7104symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7105for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7106possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7107
45e948fe
NC
71083. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7109critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7110in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7111stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7112
69da35b5 7113So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7114true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7115a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7116binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7117massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7118requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7119will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7120
c0065db7 7121@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7122@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7123@item adding additional names
7124Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7125A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7126exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7127when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7128import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7129
c0065db7 7130@example
dc8465bf
NC
7131LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7132
7133EXPORTS
c0065db7 7134foo
dc8465bf 7135_foo = foo
c0065db7 7136@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7137
7138The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7139
7140Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7141source code using the "weak" attribute:
7142
c0065db7
RM
7143@example
7144void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7145void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7146@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7147
7148See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7149symbols.
7150
7151@item renaming symbols
7152Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7153kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7154@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7155DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7156created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7157
c0065db7 7158@example
dc8465bf
NC
7159LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7160
7161EXPORTS
7162_foo = foo
c0065db7 7163@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7164
7165The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7166@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7167@end table
dc8465bf 7168
0a5d968e 7169Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7170unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7171If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7172@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7173that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7174@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7175renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7176to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7177the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7178In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7179which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7180
7181@cindex weak externals
7182@item weak externals
7183The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7184weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7185defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7186are three variants of weak externals:
7187@itemize
7188@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7189called lazy externals.
7190@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7191This form is not presently implemented.
7192@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7193implemented.
7194@end itemize
7195As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7196are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7197uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7198
7199@cindex aligned common symbols
7200@item aligned common symbols
7201As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7202desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7203the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7204carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7205by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7206tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7207but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7208warnings about unknown linker directives.
2ca22b03
NC
7209@end table
7210
7211@ifclear GENERIC
7212@lowersections
7213@end ifclear
7214@end ifset
7215
e0001a05
NC
7216@ifset XTENSA
7217@ifclear GENERIC
7218@raisesections
7219@end ifclear
7220
7221@node Xtensa
7222@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7223
7224@cindex Xtensa processors
7225The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7226@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7227specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7228keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7229example, with the command:
7230
7231@smallexample
7232SECTIONS
7233@{
7234 .text : @{
7235 *(.literal .text)
7236 @}
7237@}
7238@end smallexample
7239
7240@noindent
7241@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7242and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7243literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7244interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7245group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7246files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7247and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7248
43cd72b9 7249@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7250@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7251Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7252provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7253is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7254literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7255will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7256location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7257the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7258unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7259@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7260range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7261
7262For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7263to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7264instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7265instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7266instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7267@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7268hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7269By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7270switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7271density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7272instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7273performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7274linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7275a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7276
7277The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7278control the linker:
7279
7280@cindex Xtensa options
7281@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7282@item --size-opt
7283When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7284more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7285no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7286alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7287preserve the correctness of the code.
7288@end table
e0001a05
NC
7289
7290@ifclear GENERIC
7291@lowersections
7292@end ifclear
7293@end ifset
7294
252b5132
RH
7295@ifclear SingleFormat
7296@node BFD
7297@chapter BFD
7298
7299@cindex back end
7300@cindex object file management
7301@cindex object formats available
7302@kindex objdump -i
7303The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7304These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7305object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7306format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7307it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7308associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7309object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7310(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7311list all the formats available for your configuration.
7312
7313@cindex BFD requirements
7314@cindex requirements for BFD
7315As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7316several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7317BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7318formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7319been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7320BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7321may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7322
7323One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7324mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7325useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7326conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7327
7328@menu
7329* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7330@end menu
7331
7332@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7333@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7334@cindex opening object files
7335@include bfdsumm.texi
7336@end ifclear
7337
7338@node Reporting Bugs
7339@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7340@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7341@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7342
ff5dcc92 7343Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7344
7345Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7346it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7347to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7348work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7349@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7350
7351In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7352information that enables us to fix the bug.
7353
7354@menu
7355* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7356* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7357@end menu
7358
7359@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7360@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7361@cindex bug criteria
7362
7363If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7364
7365@itemize @bullet
7366@cindex fatal signal
7367@cindex linker crash
7368@cindex crash of linker
7369@item
7370If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7371@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7372
7373@cindex error on valid input
7374@item
ff5dcc92 7375If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7376
7377@cindex invalid input
7378@item
ff5dcc92 7379If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7380may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7381object files are correct.
7382
7383@item
7384If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7385improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7386@end itemize
7387
7388@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7389@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7390@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7391@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7392
7393A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7394products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7395recommend you contact that organization first.
7396
7397You can find contact information for many support companies and
7398individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7399distribution.
7400
ad22bfe8 7401@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7402Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7403@value{BUGURL}.
7404@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7405
7406The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7407@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7408fact or leave it out, state it!
7409
7410Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7411problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7412assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7413matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7414the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7415location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7416were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7417into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7418specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7419and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7420
7421Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7422the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7423on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7424
7425Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7426bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7427respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7428You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7429
7430To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7431
7432@itemize @bullet
7433@item
ff5dcc92 7434The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7435the @samp{--version} argument.
7436
7437Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7438the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7439
7440@item
ff5dcc92 7441Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7442patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7443
7444@item
7445The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7446version number.
7447
7448@item
ff5dcc92 7449What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7450``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7451
7452@item
7453The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7454observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7455list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7456sufficient.
7457
7458If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7459and then we might not encounter the bug.
7460
7461@item
7462A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7463bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7464provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7465bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7466state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7467requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7468we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7469attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7470
7471If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7472@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7473object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7474@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7475how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7476
7477@item
7478A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7479incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7480
ff5dcc92 7481Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7482will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7483not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7484a chance to make a mistake.
7485
7486Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7487say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7488copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7489C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7490and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7491fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7492you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7493any conclusion from our observations.
7494
7495@item
ff5dcc92 7496If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7497diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7498@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7499If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7500context, not by line number.
7501
7502The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7503sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7504@end itemize
7505
7506Here are some things that are not necessary:
7507
7508@itemize @bullet
7509@item
7510A description of the envelope of the bug.
7511
7512Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7513which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7514changes will not affect it.
7515
7516This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7517will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7518with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7519We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7520
7521Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7522of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7523output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7524less time, and so on.
7525
7526However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7527report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7528
7529@item
7530A patch for the bug.
7531
7532A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7533the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7534a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7535to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7536
ff5dcc92 7537Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7538construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7539through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7540able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7541fixed.
7542
7543And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7544patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7545help us to understand.
7546
7547@item
7548A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7549
7550Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7551things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7552@end itemize
7553
7554@node MRI
7555@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7556@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7557To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7558linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7559alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7560described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7561simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7562@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7563linker commands; these commands are described here.
7564
7565In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7566file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7567features to make use of them.
7568
7569You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7570@samp{-c} command-line option.
7571
7572Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7573command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7574blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7575MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7576issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7577
7578Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7579
7580You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7581lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7582The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7583
7584@table @code
7585@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7586@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7587@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7588Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7589the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7590@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7591your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7592script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7593commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7594input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7595@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7596
7597@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7598@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7599Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7600in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7601
7602@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7603
7604@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7605@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7606Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7607@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7608
7609@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7610@item BASE @var{expression}
7611Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7612absolute addresses) in the output file.
7613
7614@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7615@item CHIP @var{expression}
7616@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7617This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7618
7619@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7620@item END
7621This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7622
7623@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7624@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7625Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7626language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7627
7628@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7629@item
252b5132
RH
7630S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7631
7632@item
7633IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7634
7635@item
7636COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7637@samp{COFF}
7638@end enumerate
7639
7640@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7641@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7642Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7643@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7644
7645The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7646same line, with no change in its effect.
7647
7648@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7649@item LOAD @var{filename}
7650@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7651Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7652same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7653command line.
7654
7655@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7656@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7657@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7658MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7659option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7660
7661@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7662@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7663@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7664Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7665order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7666script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7667sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7668file, in the order specified.
7669
7670@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7671@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7672@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7673@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7674Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7675@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7676
7677@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7678@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7679@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7680@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7681You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7682specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7683If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7684@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7685@end table
7686
793c5807
NC
7687@node GNU Free Documentation License
7688@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7689@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7690
370b66a1
CD
7691@node LD Index
7692@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7693
7694@printindex cp
7695
7696@tex
7697% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7698% meantime:
7699\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7700\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7701\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7702\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7703\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7704\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7705\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7706\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7707\page\colophon
7708% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7709@end tex
7710
252b5132 7711@bye
This page took 0.990703 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.